TerraModeler USER GUIDE

64-bit version

© 2021 Terrasolid Ltd, Arttu Soininen. All rights reserved.

Document created in Juli, 2021

 2

Contents
45 Display tools / Contours

46 Display tools / Display shaded surface

47 Drawing utilities / Label area

48 Drawing utilities / Label elevation

About this User Guide 49 Drawing utilities / Measure slope

Spatix/MicroStation Documentation 50 Place slope arrow / Arrows

and Terminology 51 Place slope arrow / Labels

TerraModeler 52 Profiles / Elevation grid

12 Hardware and software requirements 53 Profiles / Labels
13 Installation 54 Profiles / Layouts
16 Starting TerraModeler 57 Profiles / Levels

Tutorial 58 Profiles / Titles

20 TerraModeler interface 59 Regions / Region design
21 Opening an example design file 60 Regions / Region levels
22 Starting TerraModeler 61 Regions / Region types
23 Creating a surface model 63 Regions / Title formats
25 Viewing surface statistics 65 Editable laser model
26 Viewing triangulation 66 Element usage
27 Placing elements on surface elevation 67 Elevation labels
28 Calculating slopes 69 Insert point
30 Creating a design surface 70 Lattice database
32 Computing excavation quantities 71 LEM & DMF formats
35 Displaying a colored grid 72 Operation
37 Drawing a profile 73 Quantity calculation

74 Saving surface

75 Surface types
TerraModeler Settings
40 Cross sections / Elevation grid 77 Triangulate survey

41 Cross sections / Elevation labels 78 View elevation

42 Cross sections / Offset labels 2D Contours toolbox

43 Cross sections / Placement 80 Check Linear Elevations

44 Display tools / Color scheme legends 82 Lift 2D Contours

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

 3

Contents
85 Set Contour Elevation 151 Update Displays

Create Surfaces toolbox Domains toolbox

88 Creating a Surface Model 153 Define Domains

91 Insert Breakline Element 155 Display Domain Triangles

93 Insert Random Elements 156 Domain View

95 Rebuild Models 157 Set Area Domain

96 Triangulate Elements 158 Set Domain Between Lines

100 Triangulate Multiple Sources 159 Set Triangle Domain

102 Triangulate Survey Draw using Surface toolbox

103 Triangulate View 161 Calculate Slope

Display Regions toolbox 163 Compare Elevations

106 Display Drainage 164 Drop Element On Surface

109 Display Raster Triangles 167 Fill Area With Cells

110 Display Region Triangles 170 View Elevation

111 Display Themes 172 View Slope

Display Single toolbox Drawing Utilities toolbox

114 Modify Contour Symbology 174 Alignment Offset

116 Place Contour 176 Connect Linear Elements

118 Place Elevation Text 177 Copy Linear Element

119 Place Slope Arrow 179 Densify Linear Element

Display Surface toolbox 180 Fix Touching Elements

122 Creating a color scheme 181 Force Downstream Flow

124 Display Boundary 182 Label Area

125 Display Contours 183 Label Elevation

134 Display Elevation Texts 184 Measure Slope

137 Display Grid 185 Place Sloped Line

139 Display Shaded Surface 186 Read Piles From File

143 Display Slopes 188 Set Linear Elevation

146 Display Triangles 189 Smoothen Linear Element

148 Erase Display 191 Thin Linear Element

149 Label Peaks and Pits 192 Validate Linear Elements

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

 4

Contents
Edit Area toolbox 253 Setup Automatic Sections

197 Drop Area 254 Update Profile

199 Exclude Area Quantity toolbox

201 Flatten Area 256 Compute Alignment Quantity

203 Insert Hole Element 260 Compute Area

205 Move Area 262 Compute Prismoidal Quantity

207 Remove Area 264 Compute Quantity

Edit Point toolbox 270 Compute Section Quantity

209 Construct Breakline 275 Compute Tunnel Volume

211 Exclude Triangle 278 Define Section Templates

213 Insert Point 281 Draw Surface Intersection

214 Insert Point Along Breakline Regions toolbox

215 Move Point 283 Create Region

217 Remove Point 286 Delete Region

General toolbox 287 Edit Region Info

219 About TerraModeler 289 Move Region Center

220 Define Coordinate Setup 290 Regions

222 Help On TerraModeler 294 Update Regions

223 Model Settings Managing Surfaces

224 Save Surfaces 296 Edit pulldown menu

225 Set Scale 296 Add inferred points

297 Compress
226 Surfaces
298 Delete surface
Profiles toolbox 298 Exclude long triangles
228 Draw Alignment Sections 300 Modify elevations
301 Modify settings
234 Draw Profile
301 Profile settings
239 Draw Section View
302 Thin
241 Label Profile Elevations 303 File pulldown menu

243 Output Profile Elevations 303 Close surface

246 Output Section Elevations 304 Exit

304 Export
250 Project From Profile
304 Import
252 Project Into Profile 304 New surface

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

 5

Contents
305 Open reference 362 Lattice database / Draw contours
306 Open surface
363 Lattice database / Import fence contents
306 Restore from file
365 Viewing lattice database elevation
307 Save surface
308 User settings Key-in commands/Spaccels
309 Help pulldown menu 368 Key-in commands - M
310 Tools pulldown menu 369 Key-in commands - S
311 Utility pulldown menu

311 Copy surface

312 Lattice database Breakline types
312 Merge surfaces TIN File Format Specification
314 Output control report
377 File Organization
316 Produce contours
381 C Structure Definitions
319 Produce lattice models
324 Produce triangles Configuration Variables for
328 Statistical model MicroStation
331 Subtract surfaces
332 View statistics
Installation Directories
333 View pulldown menu

333 Fields
333 Sort by

Importing and Exporting Data

336 Export / Graphical elements

338 Export / Lattice file

341 Export / Raster image

346 Export / Triangle text file

349 Export / Xyz text file

351 Import / InfraModel file

352 Import / LandXML file

353 Import / Lattice file

355 Import / Triangles

356 Import / XYZ binary file

358 Import / XYZ text file

Lattice Database
361 Lattice database / Draw boundaries

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

> > 6

Acknowledgment
The picture on the title page was created from a CAD file provided as a courtesy of Soil and
Water Ltd, Itälahdenkatu 2, 00210 Helsinki, Finland. The CAD file was created from an aerial
photograph using TerraSurvey and TerraModeler.

© 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means -
graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information
storage and retrieval systems - without the written permission of the publisher.

Products that are referred to in this document may be either trademarks and/or registered
trademarks of the respective owners. The publisher and the author make no claim to these
trademarks.

While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisher and
the author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from the
use of information contained in this document or from the use of programs and source code
that may accompany it. In no event shall the publisher and the author be liable for any loss of
profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or
indirectly by this document.

Printed: Juli 2021 in Finland.

Trademarks
TerraBore, TerraGas, TerraHeat, TerraLink, TerraMatch, TerraModeler, TerraOpen, TerraPark,
TerraPhoto, TerraPipe, TerraScan, TerraSlave, TerraStereo, TerraStreet, and TerraSurvey are
trademarks of Terrasolid Limited.

Spatix is a trademark of GISware Integro.

MicroStation®, MDL® and MicroStation stylized "M" are registered trademarks of Bentley
Systems, Incorporated. Bentley Map PowerView and MicroStation CONNECT are trademarks of
Bentley Systems, Incorporated.

Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Acrobat Reader is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

OSTN02 and OSTN15 are trademarks of Ordnance Survey, the national mapping agency of Great
Britain.

Intergraph Raster File Formats - Copyright - 1994 Intergraph Corporation. Used with permission.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

About this User Guide > > 7

About this User Guide

This document serves as a user's guide for the 64-bit versions of TerraModeler. The entry-level
version, TerraModeler Lite, is functionally a subset of the full version, TerraModeler.
TerraModeler UAV is aiming to users who process point clouds collected with UAS (Unmanned
Airborne Systems, also referred to systems carried by Drones). Tools available in TerraModeler,
TerraModeler UAV, and/or TerraModeler Lite work identically in all versions. Tools that are not
available in TerraModeler Lite are marked as "Not Lite" in the documentation. Tools that are not
available in TerraModeler UAV are marked with "Not UAV" in the documentation.

The PDF version of the user guide is created in order to provide an offline version of the online
webhelp. It shall be updated together with the webhelp. Some parts of the webhelp may be
left out on purpose in the PDF document. In case of inconsistency, the online webhelp is the
primary source of information. The user is responsible for keeping his/her offline version
updated.

Document conventions
The following conventions and symbols appear in this guide:

· Data click - click on the data mouse button, usually the left button on a right-hand mouse.
· Reset click - click on the reset mouse button, usually the right button on a right-hand mouse.
· < > - angle brackets are used to refer to keyboard keys, for example, <Enter>.
· Command - type a command in the Spaccels window of Spatix or the key-in line of
MicroStation and then press <Enter>.
· OR - alternate procedures or steps in a procedure.
· C:\TERRA64 - paths to directories of files on a hard disk are written with capital letters.
· To do - the beginning of a workflow is introduced with bold-italic letters.
· When no distinction between Spatix and MicroStation versions is necessary, this document
refers to the CAD environment simply as "CAD platform".
Notes and hints are highlighted in light blue boxes.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Spatix/MicroStation Documentation and Terminology > > 8

Spatix documentation
The User Guide for Spatix is published by GISware Integro and delivered as PDF with the
software. It can be opened with the Manual command from the Help menu of Spatix.

Terrasolid software runs on top of Spatix. The functionality of Terrasolid software is the same in
Spatix and on top of Bentley products whenever possible. Any differences are clearly
mentioned in the User Guide.

MicroStation documentation
This user guide is written under the assumption that the reader knows how to use the basic
MicroStation features. You should refer to any documentation of MicroStation whenever you
need information about tools and functionality of the CAD platform.

Terrasolid software runs on top of the full version of Bentley MicroStation or some other CAD
products of Bentley, such as PowerDraft. Compatible Bentley products are listed on Terrasolid's
webpage. The CAD platform causes no difference in functionality of Terrasolid software.
Therefore, only the term "MicroStation" is used when referring to any Bentley product.

Terminology
Spatix and MicroStation often use different terms for referring to the same thing. Long-time
users of MicroStation are used to the terminology of the Bentley products. New Spatix users
without MicroStation knowledge only get to know the Spatix terminology.

To keep the text of the User Guide simple, only one term is used (normally the MicroStation
term) if no specific separation of MicroStation and Spatix terminology is necessary. The
following table provides an overview of the terminology of the two CAD platforms:

MICROSTATION SPATIX REMARK

Level Layer also Level list, Level manager, Active
level
Select Element Choose Element selection tool
Line string Polyline element type
Shape Polygon element type
Complex element Big element element type
· Create Complex · Construct Big Element · tool
Chain / Big line · tool
· Create Complex · Construct Big Element
Shape / Big polygon
Cell Symbol element type, also Cell library

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Spatix/MicroStation Documentation and Terminology > > 9

MICROSTATION SPATIX REMARK

Fence (= selected = selected polygon many TerraScan functions consider a
shape) selected polygon as fence
Key-in command Spaccel (Spatix typed command to call a function, also
accelerates) key-in window, key-in line

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler > > 10

TerraModeler

Introduction
TerraModeler is a terrain modeling application built on top of a CAD platform. It enables the
creation of triangulated models of ground, soil layers or design surfaces. The models can be
created based on survey data, graphical elements, XYZ text files, point cloud data loaded in
TerraScan or stored in LAS or TerraScan binary formats.

Theoretically, TerraModeler can handle an unlimited number of different surfaces in the same
CAD file. In practice, however, the number and size of loaded models as well as the
performance of TerraModeler and the CAD platform depend on the RAM of the computer.

You can edit any of the surface models interactively. Editing options include add, move or
delete individual points; move, drop, or flatten all the points inside a fence; construct
breaklines and add new elements to the models.

Surface models can be used, for example, as a design aid. You can place elements on the
elevation of the surface model or drop existing elements to follow the surface.

Profile generation in TerraModeler includes separate tools for drawing 3D section views,
profiles and alignment cross sections or tunnel sections. Additionally, 3D elements can be
projected into a profile and elements drawn in a profile can be projected back to their true 3D
positions.

Surface model visualization can be done by generating contours, drawing colored triangles,
shaded surfaces, colored grid displays, slope arrows and numerical representations of elevation
points. All of these visualization displays can be updated after you have made modifications to
a surface model.

Tools for quantity computation can be utilized to calculate and report the volume between two
surfaces and/or based on tunnel or trench sections. The area of computation can be limited to
take place only inside a fence.

While many tools in TerraModeler are suited for traditional survey data types, TerraModeler
can also work with point cloud data because it is tightly integrated with TerraScan. Point clouds
loaded in TerraScan can be used to create a surface model in TerraModeler. This is especially
useful for ground classification verification because the surface model is updated automatically
according to point class changes as long as the surface model is linked with the point cloud. In
addition, the point cloud can be used directly for quantity computations.

The full version of TerraModeler includes tools for producing lattice models, triangles, and
contour lines in batch processes for large project areas. The processes can produce the output
files based on point clouds organized in a TerraScan project. Additionally, breaklines can be
included in the contour line/lattice model/triangle creation.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler > > 11

TerraModeler Lite

TerraModeler Lite is a light version of TerraModeler and provides a subset of the functionality
of the full version. It can be used create and manually edit surface models from design data, to
display models, to compute simple quantities and to create profiles.

TerraModeler Lite does not include advanced quantity computation tools, domain or region
tools and it provides only a limited selection of display methods for surface models.

The Function matrix provides a complete overview of tools and commands available in the
different TerraModeler versions.

TerraModeler UAV

TerraModeler UAV is another lighter version of TerraModeler dedicated for processing data that
is collected by UAV-mounted devices.

TerraModeler UAV does not include domain or region tools. It is available only in a bundle with
other Terra UAV applications, such as TerraScan UAV, TerraMatch UAV and/or TerraPhoto UAV.

The Function matrix provides a complete overview of tools and commands available in the
different TerraScan versions.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler > Hardware and software requirements > 12

Hardware and software requirements

TerraModeler is built on top of a CAD platform, such as Spatix or Bentley MicroStation. You must
have a computer system capable of running any compatible CAD platform.

Terra applications run parallel on Spatix and on MicroStation. Only one installation of Terra
applications is needed and files are shared by the CAD platforms, such as license and settings
files.

To run TerraModeler, you must have the following:

· quad-core processor or better, good processor frequency

· 8 GB RAM minimum, 16 GB RAM or more recommended
· 1024*768 resolution display or better
· SSD hard disc or other storage device with fast access speed is recommended
· Windows x64 version 7 or later
· Any of the compatible CAD platforms:

GISware Integro, purchased by Bentley

Terrasolid

· Spatix · MicroStation CONNECT Edition

· PowerDraft CONNECT Edition
· OpenCities Map PowerView
CONNECT Edition
· OpenCities Map CONNECT Edition
· OpenCities Map Enterprise
CONNECT Edition
· ContextCapture Editor CONNECT
Edition
· OpenRoads Designer

Installation of TerraModeler requires about 5 MB of free hard disk space.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler > Installation > 13

Installation
Terrasolid applications may be delivered as a zip file or on a USB-Stick. The installation package
of Terrasolid applications for Spatix includes the setup for Spatix itself as well. Therefore, you
can install Spatix and Terrasolid software in one step.

A zip package contains the software - it does not include the User Guides. This is the normal
delivery method of the software if you download it from the Terrasolid webserver.

A USB-Stick may include the User Guides in PDF format in addition to the installation files. The
USB-Stick may further include versions for multiple environments. You choose the version
which corresponds to your operating system and MicroStation version. You install Terrasolid
software from an USB-Stick probably only if you participate in a training event.

To install TerraModeler from a zip file together or on top of Spatix:

1. Unpack the zip archive with any zip file manager.

2. Start SETUP.EXE which is part of the zip archive. You must have administrator permissions in
order to run setup successfully.
The installation program tries to determine where Spatix has been installed and opens the
Terra Setup dialog:

3. Check and possibly change the installation folder of Spatix. Click on the Browse button in
order to select a new installation folder for Spatix. The folder is created automatically, if it
does not exist.

4. Define the directory where to install TerraModeler and maybe other Terra applications.
The default path is C:\TERRA64. You can change this to another location. The specified
directory is created automatically, if it does not exist. Install all Terrasolid applications into

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler > Installation > 14

one folder, such as C:/TERRA64.

5. Select all Terrasolid applications that you want to install.

Select either the full version, the UAV version or the Lite version of an application. The
versions do not run parallel on the same CAD platform.

6. Click OK to start the installation.

A message is displayed when the installation is finished.

To install TerraModeler from a zip file on top of MicroStation:

1. Unpack the zip archive with any zip file manager.

2. Start SETUP.EXE which is part of the zip archive.

This may open a dialog confirming the execution of SETUP.EXE and/or prompting for the
administrator password.
The installation program needs to know where the CAD platform (Spatix or MicroStation) has
been installed. It automatically searches all local hard disks to find the CAD platform
installation directory.
The installation dialog opens. The dialog is the same for all Terra applications:

3. Define the directory where to install TerraModeler.

The default path is C:\TERRA. You may change this to another location. The specified
directory is created automatically if it does not exist.

4. Check the MicroStation CE directory. Replace the path if the correct location was not found
automatically.

5. Click OK to start the installation.

A message is displayed when the installation is finished.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler > Installation > 15

The installation folder contains a README.TXT file which explains the installation of the
software in batch mode. The allows to install several Terrasolid applications in one step.

To install TerraModeler from USB-Stick on top of MicroStation:

1. Insert the USB-Stick.

2. Locate the correct directory which corresponds to your computer configuration.

3. Start SETUP.EXE from that directory.

The installation program tries to determine where MicroStation has been installed and
opens the Terra Setup dialog.

4. Define the directory where to install TerraModeler and maybe other Terra applications.
The default path is C:\TERRA. You can change this to another location. The specified directory
is created automatically, if it does not exist.

5. Check the MicroStation directory. Replace the path if the correct location was not found
automatically.
You can use the Scan button to automatically search the hard disk for the MicroStation
installation. Alternatively, you can use the Browse button to locate the MicroStation
installation folder yourself.

6. Click OK to continue.
This opens another Terra Setup dialog.

7. Select the TerraModeler for MicroStation item in the dialog.

You may select all applications for which you have installation files.

8. Click OK to start the installation.

A message is displayed when the installation is finished.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler > Starting TerraModeler > 16

Starting TerraModeler
TerraModeler is an application that runs on top of Spatix (Ix App) or MicroStation (MDL
Application).

To start TerraModeler in Spatix:

1. Select Execute command from the Ix Apps menu in Spatix.
The Choose Ix app to execute dialog opens, a standard Windows dialog to open a file.

2. Browse to the \APP folder of the Terra applications installation directory.

By default, the path is C:\TERRA64\APP.

3. Select the tmodel.ix file.

You may select other applications as well.

4. Click Open in order to start all selected applications.

To start TerraModeler in MicroStation:

1. Select MDL Applications command from the Utilities menu in MicroStation.
The MDL dialog opens:

2. In the Available Applications list, select TMODEL.

3. Click the Load button.

OR

1. Key in MDL LOAD TMODEL.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler > Starting TerraModeler > 17

The Available Applications list shows all MDL applications that MicroStation is able to locate.
MicroStation searches for MDL applications in the directories listed in MS_MDLAPPS
configuration variable. If MicroStation can not find TMODEL.MA, you should check the
variable in the Configuration Variable dialog of MicroStation. Make sure the directory path of
the TMODEL.MA file is included in the variable values. See also Installation Directories and
Configuration Variables for more information.

When the application is loaded, it opens the TerraModeler toolbox:

If the TerraModeler toolbox is accidentally closed, it can be re-opened with the keyin
command:
model app main

Unloading TerraModeler
TerraModeler is unloaded automatically when you exit Spatix or MicroStation. Sometimes you
may want to unload the application while continuing to work with the CAD platform. This frees
up the memory reserved by TerraModeler.

To unload TerraModeler in Spatix:

1. Select tmodel.ix command from the Ix Apps menu in Spatix.
The IxApp Properties dialog opens:

2. Click on the Stop button.

This unloads TerraModeler, closes the TerraModeler toolbox and updates the Status and
IxApp Info in the IxApp Properties dialog.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler > Starting TerraModeler > 18

3. Close the dialog with OK or Cancel.

To unload TerraModeler in MicroStation:

1. Select MDL Applications command from the Utilities pulldown menu in MicroStation.
The MDL dialog opens:

2. In the Loaded Applications list, select TMODEL.

3. Click on the Unload button.

OR

1. Key in MDL UNLOAD TMODEL.

This unloads the application and frees the memory allocated for it.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Tutorial > > 19

Tutorial
Not Spatix

This tutorial introduces some basic concepts and terminology used by TerraModeler. With the
help of an example MicroStation design file, you are guided through a number of exercises
using some of the features in the software. The tutorial assumes that you are already familiar
with basic viewing and drawing tools in MicroStation.

TerraModeler interface
Opening an example design file
Starting TerraModeler
Creating a surface model
Viewing surface statistics
Viewing triangulation
Placing elements on surface elevation
Calculating slopes
Creating a design surface
Computing excavation quantities
Displaying a colored grid
Drawing a profile

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Tutorial > TerraModeler interface > 20

TerraModeler interface
When you load TerraModeler, it opens its TerraModeler toolbox. All TerraModeler tools are
located in this toolbox, which actually includes 14 toolbars. These toolbars can be dragged out
from the toolbox. They contain icons representing the individual tools. To activate a tool, click
the tool icon.

You can control the operation of a tool with tool settings. These are control items affecting the
operation of that specific tool. Most of the tools display their settings in a separate dialog
where you can enter the appropriate values.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Tutorial > Opening an example design file > 21

Opening an example design file

This tutorial uses an example MicroStation design file that is included in the setup of
TerraModeler. This example file has been provided by courtesy of Soil and Water Ltd, a
company with expertise in many fields of civil engineering. The design file was created from an
aerial photograph using TerraSurvey.

To open the example design file:

1. Select Open command from the File ribbon in MicroStation.
The Open Design File dialog opens.

2. Locate the MODEL.DGN file by browsing your computer’s directory structure.

If you installed TerraModeler in the default directory C:\TERRA64, you can find the design file
in C:\TERRA64\EXAMPLE\MODEL.DGN.

3. Select MODEL.DGN and click OK.

After opening the design file, you can take a closer look at it. View 1 has been fitted to show
all the elements in the design file. You can rotate this view or zoom in to see smaller details.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Tutorial > Starting TerraModeler > 22

Starting TerraModeler
Start TerraModeler as described in Section Starting TerraModeler.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Tutorial > Creating a surface model > 23

Creating a surface model

TerraModeler can create a surface model from a number of data sources. The best tool to use
depends on the source and format of the data:

DATA SOURCE: USE TOOL:

Triangulate Survey after reading in the survey
Survey data
data with TerraSurvey.
Design file elements Triangulate View or Triangulate Elements.
Surfaces tool opens a window for managing
surfaces. The File pulldown menu in this
XYZ text file
window has a command for importing xyz
text files.

To create a surface model in the example design file:

1. Bring View 2 in front of the other views.
This view displays only selected levels in the design file. Elements that do not reside on the
ground elevation have been hidden by switching off their levels.

2. Select Triangulate View tool from the Create Surfaces toolbox.

3. Identify view 2.
The Triangulate surface dialog opens:

4. Click OK.
The Surface settings dialog opens:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Tutorial > Creating a surface model > 24

5. Enter Ground as the surface name.

6. Click OK.
TerraModeler processes the information. A progress bar shows the progress of the process.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Tutorial > Viewing surface statistics > 25

Viewing surface statistics

You just created your first surface model with TerraModeler. The model exists in two types of
memory. It has been saved to a binary file on the hard disk for permanent storage. When you
work with TerraModeler, the surface model is also loaded in the RAM of your computer.

You can use the Surfaces tool to view information about loaded surfaces.

To view surface statistics:

1. Select Surfaces tool from the General toolbox.
The Surfaces window opens showing a list of loaded surfaces. Select surface model Ground,
if it is not selected already.

2. Select View statistics from the Utility menu.

The Surface statistics dialog opens:

The dialog shows the internal ID of the surface model, the number of points and triangles,
and the ranges of easting, northing, and elevation coordinates.

3. Click OK after reviewing the statistics.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Tutorial > Viewing triangulation > 26

Viewing triangulation
TerraModeler creates surface models by triangulation. This means that the application creates a
network of triangles connecting the points in the model. The network is constructed in a way
that there is one triangle at every XY location inside the surface area. Thus, in a surface model
every XY location has one and only one elevation value.

To view the triangulation:

1. Zoom in on a position in View 2 inside the surveyed area.

2. Select Exclude Triangle tool from the Edit Point toolbox.

This tool can be used to excluding or including triangles. In TerraModeler terminology, to
exclude a triangle means to mark it as invalid or unknown.
This tool can also be used just to view the triangulation.

3. Move the mouse inside View 2. As you move the mouse, TerraModeler displays the triangle
at the mouse pointer position.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Tutorial > Placing elements on surface elevation > 27

Placing elements on surface elevation

A surface model can be used as a design aid. TerraModeler makes it easy to place elements at
the elevation of a surface. You may use this capability, for example, to place items such as
manholes, trees, or shrubs on the ground elevation.

To place elements on surface elevation:

1. Select View Elevation tool from the Draw toolbox.
The View elevation dialog opens:

As you move the mouse, the dialog dynamically displays the elevation value of the selected
Surface at the mouse pointer position.

2. Set Points on surface lock on.

3. Start drawing an element using any MicroStation tool for drawing elements. Feel free to
experiment with by drawing some lines, shapes, or placing a few cells.
The elements are drawn as 3D elements using the elevation value from the Ground surface.

When Points on surface lock is on, TerraModeler calculates the elevation for all data points
entered in a top view inside the surface area. Therefore, be sure to turn the lock off if you do
not want to use it any longer.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Tutorial > Calculating slopes > 28

Calculating slopes
When designing new construction surfaces, you may need to create a slope onto an existing
surface. Calculate Slope tool supports this task. As a first step, you have to create a graphical
element representing the upper or lower edge of a slope. The example design file has a
suitable element for this purpose. It is a green shape element that represents the bottom of a
flat rectangular excavation at elevation +29.50.

To locate the shape element:

1. Bring View 4 in front of all other views.
The view displays only the green shape element on level 56.

To calculate a slope upwards to the ground surface:

1. Select yellow as the active color.

2. Select the Calculate Slope tool.

This opens the Slope dialog:

3. Enter 20 as the slope Angle.

4. Select Ground as the Onto surface.

5. Identify the green shape element as the element to start from.

6. Define the slope direction with a data point outside the shape element. This means that the
slope is calculated outwards from the element.
The application calculates a slope upwards from the element at an angle of 20 degrees. It
draws the upper edge of the slope as a yellow line string.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Tutorial > Calculating slopes > 29

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Tutorial > Creating a design surface > 30

Creating a design surface

TerraModeler can be used to create design surfaces for earthworks projects. The best approach
is to first create graphical elements representing the shape of the design surface. This is exactly
what you did in the previous step with the Calculate Slope tool. You can now use the green
shape element and the yellow slope element to create a new design surface.

To create a design surface:

1. Select the elements in View 4.
Your selection set should include the green shape element and the yellow line string
representing the upper slope edge.

2. Select Insert Breakline Element tool from the Create Surfaces toolbox.
This opens the Insert Breakline Element dialog:

3. Select New surface as the Surface to insert points into and Type as Hard breakline .

4. Switch Generate points along breakline on and enter 10.0 into the Every field.
This setting generates new points along a long breakline if the distance between two
breakline points is longer than 10 meters.

5. Accept the elements.

This opens the Triangulate surface dialog.

6. Accept default settings by clicking OK which opens the Surface settings dialog:

7. Select Plan in the Type field.

8. Enter Plan as the surface Name.

9. Click OK.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Tutorial > Creating a design surface > 31

TerraModeler creates a new surface using the vertices of the selected elements.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Tutorial > Computing excavation quantities > 32

Computing excavation quantities

You have now two surface models. The first one, Ground, is based on survey information. The
second one, Plan, is a design model of a planned excavation with slopes onto the ground
surface.

You are ready to compute excavation quantities using the Compute Quantity tool. It computes
the volume between two surfaces and produces results summing up both, cut and fill volumes.
The calculation is based on a grid method.

To compute excavation quantities:

1. Select Compute Quantity tool from the Quantity toolbox.
The Compute Quantity dialog opens:

2. Select Ground as the Upper surface.

3. Select Plan as the Lower surface.

4. Enter 1.0 as the Step value.

5. Make sure that Draw temporarily or Write to file is selected as the Display option and Vertical
lines as Draw as option.

6. Click on the Calculate button to start computation.

The application starts calculating the volume between the two surfaces. It displays the
progress of the calculation as vertical linear elements. The color of each line indicates if that
grid position results in cut or fill volume.
When the calculation is finished, check the results. TerraModeler reports about 7951 cubic
meters of cut volume and about 36 cubic meters of fill volume. The cut volume is a correct
value. The fill volume, however, is something you may want to take a closer look at.
When TerraModeler creates a surface model, the triangulated area is a concave polygon
which encloses all the points in the model. To control the actual area that should be covered
by the model, you can exclude some of unnecessary triangles on the outer boundaries.
When you create a surface with tools in TerraModeler, the application can automatically
exclude narrow, long triangles from the outer boundaries. The same task can be done later
by modifying an existing surface model.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Tutorial > Computing excavation quantities > 33

In our excavation example, you may decide simply to ignore the fill volume reported by the
Compute Quantity tool as you know for sure that the fill volume should be zero.
Alternatively, you may decide to exclude the extra triangles in the Plan surface model.

To exclude triangles from the excavation automatically:

1. Select Surfaces tool from General toolbox.
The Surfaces window opens showing a list of loaded surfaces. Select surface Plan if it is not
selected already.

2. Select Exclude long triangles command from the Edit pulldown menu.
The Exclude long triangles dialog opens:

3. Switch on Exclude outer triangles and type 12.0 as the maximum length in the Longer than
field.

4. Click OK.

To exclude triangles manually:

1. Select Exclude Triangle tool from the Edit Point toolbox.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Tutorial > Computing excavation quantities > 34

2. Select Plan as the active surface in the tool’s dialog.

3. Enter a data click inside each of the triangles to exclude.

After excluding the extra triangles, you may recalculate the excavation quantities as
described above.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Tutorial > Displaying a colored grid > 35

Displaying a colored grid

A surface model is often used for visualization purposes. TerraModeler is able to display a
surface model with several display method.

To display a colored grid:

1. Select Display Grid tool from the Display Surface toolbox.

The Display grid dialog opens:

2. Select Ground in the Surface field and Display only in the Mode field.

3. Enter 10.0 in the Grid size field.

4. Click on the Colors button to define a coloring scheme.

The Coloring scheme dialog opens:

5. Select Open command from the File menu to load a coloring scheme from a file.

6. Locate and open MODEL.CLR file.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Tutorial > Displaying a colored grid > 36

If you installed TerraModeler in the default directory C:\TERRA64, you can find this file in C:
\TERRA64\EXAMPLE\MODEL.CLR.

7. Click OK to close the Coloring scheme dialog.

8. Click OK to close the Display grid dialog.

TerraModeler draws a colored grid. To view the grid, use view controls to change the rotation
angle and to zoom in or out. Use view 2 for displaying the grid.

Make sure the level used in displaying the grid is switched on in View 2. The default level is
51. You may also switch off the Clip Front and Clip Back options in the View Attributes dialog
for View 2.

The grid was drawn in Display only mode. This means that TerraModeler did not write the
grid into the design file. The grid is erased when you unload TerraModeler or exit
MicroStation. Alternatively, you can erase the grid with Erase Display tool.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Tutorial > Drawing a profile > 37

Drawing a profile
You can create a profile along any linear element. The profile shows the shape of surface
models along the alignment element. A profile is drawn as a cell element that can be freely
positioned anywhere in the design file.

To create an alignment element:

1. Make an empty level the active level in MicroStation.

2. Place a line string element that runs across or inside the ground surface model using the
Place Line String tool in MicroStation.

To draw a profile:
1. Select the Draw Profile tool.

2. Identify the alignment element you just created and accept the highlighted element.
The Draw profile dialog opens:

3. Define settings in the dialog.

4. Click on the Surfaces button and select Ground as the only surface for being drawn in profiles
in the Profile surfaces dialog.

5. Click on the Labels button and define settings in the Profile labels dialog.

6. Enter a data point to position the profile cell. It is a good idea to position the profile outside
the surveyed site in order to avoid overlap with any existing elements.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > > 38

TerraModeler Settings
Settings control the way how tools and commands of TerraModeler work. They are organized in
logical categories. The TerraModeler Settings dialog is opened by the Settings tool.

SETTINGS FOLDER / CATEGORY SETTINGS CATEGORY

Cross sections / Elevation grid Editable laser model
Cross sections / Elevation labels Element usage
Cross sections / Offset labels Elevation labels
Cross sections / Placement Insert point
Display tools / Color scheme legends Lattice database Not Lite, Not UAV
Display tools / Contours LEM & DMF formats
Display tools / Display shaded surface Operation
Drawing utilities / Label area Quantity calculation
Drawing utilities / Label elevation Saving surface

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > > 39

SETTINGS FOLDER / CATEGORY SETTINGS CATEGORY

Drawing utilities / Measure slope Surface types
Place slope arrow / Arrows Not Lite Triangulate survey
Place slope arrow / Labels Not Lite View elevation
Profiles / Elevation grid
Profiles / Labels
Profiles / Layouts
Profiles / Levels
Profiles / Titles
Regions / Region design Not Lite, Not UAV
Regions / Region levels Not Lite, Not UAV
Regions / Region types Not Lite, Not UAV
Regions / Title formats Not Lite, Not UAV

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Cross sections / Elevation grid > 40

Cross sections / Elevation grid category

Elevation grid category in Cross sections folder defines the symbology of elevation grid range
lines and labels in cross sections.

SETTING EFFECT
Style Defines the line style of range lines. Uses
CAD file line styles.
Weight Defines the line weight of range lines. Uses
CAD file line weights.
Font Font type of elevation grid labels.
Size Text size of elevation grid range labels. Given
in millimeters on paper.
On side Defines the location of labels of range
elevations: on the Left, on the Right or on
Both sides of the range.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Cross sections / Elevation labels > 41

Cross sections / Elevation labels category

Elevation labels category in Cross sections folder defines the symbology of elevation labels in
cross sections.

SETTING EFFECT
Font Font type of elevation labels. Uses font types
available in the CAD platform.
Size Text size of elevation labels. Given in
millimeters on paper.
Direction Text rotation: horizontal or vertical.
Digits Number of full-number digits in elevation
labels.
Decimals Number of decimals in elevation labels.
Color Text and note line color for binding elevation
labels. Uses the active color table of the CAD
file.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Cross sections / Offset labels > 42

Cross sections / Offset labels category

Offset labels category in Cross sections folder defines the symbology of offset labels in cross
sections.

SETTING EFFECT
Font Font type of offset labels. Uses font types
available in the CAD platform.
Size Text size of offset labels. Given in
millimeters on paper.
Color Color of offset labels. Uses the active color
table of the CAD file.
Direction Text rotation: horizontal or vertical.
Show sign in offsets If on, the plus (+) sign is displayed for
positive and the minus (-) sign for negative
offset label values.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Cross sections / Placement > 43

Cross sections / Placement category

Placement category in Cross sections folder defines how Draw Alignment Sections tool groups
the cross sections for the display.

SETTING EFFECT
Rows Defines how many cross sections to draw on
top of each other.
Order Order of cross sections in a group:
· First one at the bottom - station values
increase upwards.
· First one at the top - station values increase
downwards.
X spacing Defines the spacing between cross sections in
X direction (between cross section columns).
Y spacing Defines the spacing between cross sections in
Y direction (between cross section rows).

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Display tools / Color scheme legends > 44

Display tools / Color scheme legends

Color scheme legends category in Display tools folder defines the size and the symbology of
color scheme legend bars, boundaries and labels.

SETTING EFFECT
Scale Method for scaling the color bar height:
· Fixed - every color occupies the same height
in the bar. You can define the height of one
color as millimeters on paper.
· Relative - height of a color is relative to its
elevation or slope interval. You can define
the height of the whole bar.
Height Height of one color in the color bar or of the
whole color bar. This depends on the setting
for Scale described above. Given in
millimeters on paper.
Width Color bar width in millimeters on paper.
Draw border If on, an outer border line is drawn around the
color bar using the given Border color and line
weight.
Draw boundary lines If on, each color of the color bar is surrounded
by a boundary line using the given Boundary
color and line weight.
Symbology Color and line weight of boundary labels of
color schemes. Uses CAD file colors and line
weights.
Font Font type of color scheme labels. Uses font
types available in the CAD platform.
Size Text size of color scheme labels. Given in
millimeters on paper.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Display tools / Contours > 45

Display tools / Contours category

Contours category in Display tools folder defines the default symbology of contour line labels.

SETTING EFFECT
Font Font type of contour labels. Uses font types
available in the CAD platform.
Size Text size of contour labels. Given in
millimeters on paper.
Style Line style of contour line labels. Uses CAD
file line styles.
Weight Line weight of contour line labels. Uses CAD
file line weights.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Display tools / Display shaded surface > 46

Display tools / Display Shaded Surface category

Display Shaded Surface category in Display tools folder defines default settings for the shaded
surface display mode.

SETTING EFFECT
Sun azimuth Azimuth angle of the sun. North direction is
defined as 0 degree, angle values increase
clockwise.
Sun angle Angle of the sun above the horizon.
Color cycles Number of color cycles. Use zero to create a
gray scale display showing triangle slope only.
Fit to Determines how colors are fit to elevation
values:
· Whole surface - colors of the color scheme
are fit to the elevation range of the whole
surface.
· View content - colors of the color scheme
are fit to the elevation range that is visible
in a CAD file view. This results in a very
detailed display for large-scale views.
Views Views for displaying the shaded surface.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Drawing utilities / Label area > 47

Drawing utilities / Label Area category

Label Area category in Drawing utilities folder defines the format and the symbology of area
labels which Label Area tool creates.

SETTING EFFECT
Font Font type of area text elements. Uses font
types available in the CAD platform.
Size Text size of area labels. Given in millimeters
on paper.
Accuracy Number of decimals and unit for area labels.
2D area label prefix/suffix Prefix/Suffix that is added to the area label
of 2D areas.
3D area label prefix/suffix Prefix/Suffix that is added to the area label
of 3D areas.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Drawing utilities / Label elevation > 48

Drawing utilities / Label Elevation category

Label Elevation category in Drawing utilities folder defines the format and the symbology of
elevation labels which Label Elevation tool creates.

SETTING EFFECT
Position Position of the label related to the guiding
line: Above line, Extending from line or
Below line.
Font Font type of elevation label text elements.
Uses font types available in the CAD
platform.
Size Text size of elevation label texts. Given in
millimeters on paper.
Accuracy Number of decimals of elevation values.
Display plus If on, the plus sign is displayed for positive
elevations.
Display minus If on, the minus sign is displayed for negative
elevations.
Prefix Text added to the label before the elevation
value.
Suffix Text added to the label after the elevation
value.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Drawing utilities / Measure slope > 49

Drawing utilities / Measure Slope category

Measure Slope category in Drawing utilities folder defines the symbology of labels which
Measure Slope tool creates.

SETTING EFFECT
Font Font type of slope measurement labels. Uses
font types available in the CAD platform.
Size Text size of slope measurement labels. Given
in millimeters on paper.
Color Color of slope measurement labels. Uses the
active color table of the CAD file.
Style Line style of slope measurement labels. Uses
CAD file line styles.
Weight Line weight of slope measurement labels.
Uses CAD file line weights.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Place slope arrow / Arrows > 50

Place Slope Arrow / Arrows category

Not Lite

Arrows category in Place Slope Arrow folder defines the length and the design of arrows drawn
by Place Slope Arrow tool.

SETTING EFFECT
Place by Placement point of a slope arrow: Arrow start
or Arrow center.
Arrowheads Number of arrowheads in a slope arrow:
· One - all arrows have one arrowhead.
· One to three - number of arrowheads
depends on the slope gradient as shown in
the illustration of the arrow.
Length Two fields specifying the maximum and the
minimum length of a slope arrow. Given in
millimeters on paper.
Slope Gradient values at which the arrow length is
equal to:
- maximum length
- two thirds of maximum length
- one third of maximum length
- minimum length

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Place slope arrow / Labels > 51

Place Slope Arrow / Labels category

Not Lite

Labels category in Place Slope Arrow folder defines the format and the symbology of labels
drawn by Place Slope Arrow tool.

SETTING EFFECT
Write slope label If on, a label indicating the gradient in
percent is placed along a slope arrow.
Level Level number in the CAD file on which the
arrow label is placed.
Font Font type of slope arrow labels. Uses font
types available in the CAD platform.
Size Text size of slope arrow labels. Given in
millimeters on paper.
Accuracy Number of decimals of the slope arrow label.
Symbology Color and line weight of slope arrow labels.
Uses CAD file colors and line weights.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Profiles / Elevation grid > 52

Profiles / Elevation grid category

Elevation grid category in Profiles folder defines the symbology of elevation grid lines and
labels in profiles.

SETTING EFFECT
Style Line style of grid lines. Uses CAD file line
styles.
Weight Line weight of grid lines. Uses CAD file line
weights.
Extend left Defines how long grid lines are extended
over the left boundary of the profile. Given
in millimeters on paper.
Extend right Defines how long grid lines are extended
over the right boundary of the profile. Given
in millimeters on paper.
Font Font type of elevation grid labels in profiles.
Uses font types available in the CAD
platform.
Size Text size of elevation grid labels in profiles.
Given in millimeters on paper.
On side Defines the location of grid labels: on the
Left, on the Right or on Both sides of the
profile.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Profiles / Labels > 53

Profiles / Labels category

Labels category in Profiles folder defines the format of station and elevation labels in profiles.

SETTING EFFECT
Font Font type of profile labels. Uses font types
available in the CAD platform.
Size Text size of profile labels. Given in
millimeters on paper.
Color Text color of station labels. Uses the active
color table of the CAD file.
Direction Text rotation of station labels: horizontal or
vertical.
Digits Number of full-number digits of elevation
labels.
Decimals Number of decimals of elevation labels.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Profiles / Layouts > 54

Profiles / Layouts category

Layouts category in Profiles folder displays a list of user defined profile layouts. Each layout
definition contains a list of data rows that appear below the profile.

You can edit existing layouts by using the Edit button in the Settings dialog. This opens the
Profile layout dialog which shows data rows defined for this layout. The dialog lets you add,
edit, or delete existing data rows for a profile layout.

You can delete existing layouts by using the Delete button in the Settings dialog. The Copy
button creates an identical copy of a selected layout definition.

To define a new profile layout:

1. Open the Layouts category in the Profiles folder.

2. Click Add in the Settings dialog.

The Profile layout dialog opens:

3. Type a Name for the profile layout.

4. Click Add in the Profiles layout dialog in order to add a new data row that is displayed below
a profile.
The Bottom row dialog opens:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Profiles / Layouts > 55

5. Define basic information settings.

6. Select an auto-text option for the Content list as well as additional settings depending on the
content selection. Choose Other as Content if nothing of the list entries fit to your data.

7. Select settings for frame lines.

8. Click OK in the Bottom row dialog.

9. Add more data rows if necessary.

10. Click OK to the Profile layout dialog.

11. Close the Settings dialog in order to save the modified settings for TerraModeler.

SETTING EFFECT
Title 1 Free text used as first line of a title in the
bottom row.
Title 2 Free text used as second line of a title in the
bottom row.
Height Height of the bottom row. Given in
millimeters on paper.
Content Defines the type of information displayed in
the bottom row:
· Surface elevations - elevations of surfaces
of the given Surface type.
· Surface difference - Difference between
surfaces of the two given surface types.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Profiles / Layouts > 56

SETTING EFFECT

· Pipe - space reservation for information of a

given Pipe type. The content is filled by
TerraPipe.
· Pipe stations - space reservation for pipe
stationing of a given Pipe type. The content
is filled by TerraPipe.
· Stationing - stations along the alignment
element of the profile.
· Other - space reservation for any other
content that can be added manually.
Vertical lines on the sides If on, vertical lines are drawn on the left and
right side of the bottom row.
Horizontal line below If on, a horizontal line is drawn below the
bottom row using the given symbology.

The symbology of the bottom row titles below a profile can be set in Profiles / Titles
category.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Profiles / Levels > 57

Profiles / Levels category

Levels category in Profiles folder defines the levels on which various parts of a profile cell are
drawn.

SETTING EFFECT
Use Defines how to assign levels for profile cell
components:
· Active level - draws are components on the
active level in the CAD file.
· Level settings - you can assign levels for the
different components of the profile cell.
Referenced by CAD file level number.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Profiles / Titles > 58

Profiles / Titles category

Titles category in Profiles folder defines the symbology of profile titles and bottom row titles.

SETTING EFFECT
Font Font type of profile title and scale labels.
Uses font types available in the CAD
platform.
Size Text size of profile title and scale labels.
Given in millimeters on paper.
Width Space reserved for bottom row titles on the
left side of the profile.
Text color Text color of bottom row titles. Uses the
active color table of the CAD file.
Text weight Line weight of bottom row titles. Uses CAD
file line weights.
Font Font type of bottom row titles. Uses font
types available in the CAD platform.
Size Text size of bottom row titles. Given in
millimeters on paper.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Regions / Region design > 59

Regions / Region design category

Not Lite, Not UAV

Region design category in Regions folder defines the display symbology and boundary settings
for regions.

SETTING EFFECT
Hilite Color, line style and line weight for
displaying a highlighted region. Uses CAD file
symbology.
Display intersections If on, boundaries of intersecting regions are
displayed with the given color and line
weight.
Dangle extension Maximum gap that is closed between the end
point of one region boundary line and
another region boundary line when a region
shape is generated.
Curve stroking Maximum distance between a curve element
used as region boundary line and the
boundary of the generated region shape.
End point gap Maximum gap that is closed between the end
point of one region boundary line and the
end point of another boundary line when a
region shape is generated.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Regions / Region levels > 60

Regions / Region levels category

Not Lite, Not UAV

Region levels category in Regions folder defines the levels in the CAD file which are used for
drawing the different components of regions.

SETTING EFFECT
Level usage Levels used for region components,
referenced by level number:
· Center marker - center point of a region.
· Solution shapes - region shape boundary.
· Title text - title of a region, CAD text
element.
· Patterns - region shape as polygon with
pattern filling.
· Color fill - region shape as filled-color
polygon.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Regions / Region types > 61

Regions / Region types category

Not Lite, Not UAV

Region types category in Regions folder displays a list of types of regions. By default there are
two region types defined but more can be added using the Add button.

You can edit existing region types by using the Edit button in the Settings dialog. This opens the
Region type dialog which lets you change the symbology settings for this region type. With the
Delete button the selected region type is removed from the list.

To define a new region type:

1. Open the Region types category in the Regions folder.

2. Click Add in the Settings dialog.

This opens the Region type dialog:

3. Type a Name and (Optional) a Description for the region type.

4. Define symbology settings for region pattern. The symbology settings become active if Draw
patterning is switched on.
Custom line styles are available only in MicroStation.

5. Define symbology settings for region color fill. The symbology settings become active if Draw
color fill is switched on.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Regions / Region types > 62

6. Click OK to the Region type dialog.

7. Close the Settings dialog in order to save the modified settings for TerraModeler.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Regions / Title formats > 63

Regions / Title formats category

Not Lite, Not UAV

Title formats category in Regions folder displays a list of title formats for regions. By default
there are two region title formats defined but more can be added using the Add button.

You can edit existing region title formats by using the Edit button in the Settings dialog. This
opens the Title format dialog which lets you change the settings for this region title format.
With the Delete button the selected region title format is removed from the list.

To define a new title format for regions:

1. Open the Title formats category in the Regions folder.

2. Click Add in the Settings dialog.

This opens the Title Format dialog:

3. Type a Name for the title format and select settings for title placement.

4. Choose symbology settings for the title format.

5. Select auto-text options depending on what you want to display as a region title.

6. Click OK to the Title Format dialog.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Regions / Title formats > 64

7. Close the Settings dialog in order to save the modified settings for TerraModeler.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Editable laser model > 65

Editable laser model category

Editable laser model category defines the default settings for surface models that are created
from point cloud data.

SETTING EFFECT
Naming Naming method for new surface models:
· Ask name - user types a name when a new
model is created.
· Automatic - the new model gets the name
given in the Name field automatically.
Exclude Method of exclusion of outer boundary
triangles for new surface models:
· No exclusion - no triangles are excluded.
· Default exclusion - the software computes a
reasonable triangle length for exclusion
from the surface’s point density.
· By key-in length - triangles up to the length
given in the Longer than field are excluded.
Exclude any long triangles If on, any triangles with edge lengths longer
than the value given in the following Longer
than field are excluded (internal triangles as
well as outer boundary triangles).

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Element usage > 66

Element usage category

Element usage category defines how graphical elements are interpreted as points and how text
elements are interpreted as elevation points. The settings are used by the Triangulate Survey
tool.

SETTING EFFECT
Radius Circles smaller than defined in the Radius
field are interpreted as a single points (circle
center). Larger circles are stroked into several
points along the circumference.
Accept single character symbols If on, single character text elements are
interpreted as elevation points.
Require +- sign in numbers If on, numerical text elements must have a
sign character in order to be interpreted as
elevation labels.
Require decimal point in numbers If on, numerical text elements must have a
decimal point in order to be interpreted as
elevation labels.
Accept elevation text cells If on, MicroStation cell elements are
interpreted as elevation marker and labels.
The cell origin is used as xy location of the
elevation point and the text as elevation
label. MicroStation only

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Elevation labels > 67

Elevation labels category

Elevation labels category defines the symbology if elevation labels. The settings effect the
Insert Point tool, the Label Peaks and Pits tool, the Place Elevation Text tool, and the leveling
texts for random and inferred points of the See Export / Graphical elements command.

SETTING EFFECT
Justify Location of the placement point (= point of
elevation measurement):
· Left, Center, Right | Top, Center, Bottom -
placement point location relative to the
label text box.
· Decimal point - placement point is located
at the decimal point.
Offset dx Offset between the placement point and the
label in x (left-right) direction. Given in
millimeters on paper. Only active if Justify is
not set to Decimal point.
Offset dy Offset between the placement point and the
label in y (up-down) direction. Given in
millimeters on paper. Only active if Justify is
not set to Decimal point.
Font Font type of elevation label text elements.
Uses font types available in the CAD platform.
Size Text size of elevation label texts. Given in
millimeters on paper.
Accuracy Number of decimals of elevation labels.
Display plus If on, the plus sign is displayed for positive
elevations.
Display minus If on, the minus sign is displayed for negative
elevations.
Point marker Type of the placement point:
· None - no point marker is drawn.
· Character - a given character is drawn as
point marker.
· Zero length line - a line element of zero
length (= point) is drawn as point marker.
· Library cell - a cell element from the active
cell library is drawn as point marker.
MicroStation only

Font Font type of the point marker character. Uses

font types available in the CAD platform. Only
active if Point marker is set to Character.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Elevation labels > 68

SETTING EFFECT
Size Text size of point marker character. Given in
millimeters on paper. Only active if Point
marker is set to Character.
Character Character used as point marker symbol. Only
active if Point marker is set to Character.
Weight Weight of the point marker. Uses CAD file line
weights. Only active if Point marker is set to
Zero length line.
Cell Name of the cell used as point marker. Only
active if Point marker is set to Library cell.
MicroStation only

Size Cell size give in millimeters on paper. Only

active if Point marker is set to Library cell.
MicroStation only

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Insert point > 69

Insert Point category

Insert Point category defines whether Insert Point tool draws elevation labels permanently into
the CAD file.

SETTING EFFECT
Draw permanently If on, the text element is written to the CAD
file.
If off, the text element is displayed
temporarily.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Lattice database > 70

Lattice database category

Not Lite, Not UAV

Lattice database category defines the storage location and elevation units of lattice database
files. Additionally, it defines how lattice database files are drawn in profiles and cross sections.

SETTING EFFECT
Directory Defines the directory where lattice database
files are located. This directory may contain
Intergraph GRD, Disimp or Ordnance Survey
NTF files.
Draw in profiles If on, the lattice database files from the given
Directory are drawn in profiles and cross
sections.
Color Color of the lattice database files. Uses the
active CAD file color table. Only active if Draw
in profiles is switched on.
Weight Line weight of the lattice database files. Uses
CAD file line weights. Only active if Draw in
profiles is switched on.
Style Line style of lattice data base files:
· Standard - uses CAD file line styles.
· Custom - uses user-defined line styles.
MicroStation only
Only active if Draw in profiles is switched on.
Style name Name of a user-defined line style. The Select
button opens a list of custom styles. Only
active if Style is set to Custom. MicroStation only
Style scale Scale of a user-defined line style. Expressed
as relation between the original custom style
and a scale factor. Only active if Style is set to
Custom. MicroStation only
Intergraph Elevation unit of Intergraph GRD files. Based
on that, the software derives decimal
elevation values from the integer values
stored in the lattice files.
Disimp Elevation unit of Disimp files. Based on that,
the software derives decimal elevation values
from the integer values stored in the lattice
files.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > LEM & DMF formats > 71

LEM & DMF formats category

LEM & DMF formats category defines level and format settings for Japanese LEM & DMF format
files.

SETTING EFFECT
Search Defines where to search for polygons: in the
Active design file, Reference files, or Both.
Water bodies Level in the CAD file(s) where water
polygons are located.
Islands Level in the CAD file(s) where island
polygons are located.
Row order Order of rows in LEM files: Bottom first or Top
first.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Operation > 72

Operation category
Operation category defines what menus the application opens at start-up and how the
application can be closed.

SETTING EFFECT
Create Applications Menu Adds the Application pulldown menu to
Spatix. This does not have any effect in x64
TerraModeler and MicroStation CONNECT
Edition.
Open Main tool box If on, the application opens its TerraModeler
toolbox at start-up.
Open Surfaces window If on, the application opens the Surfaces
window at start-up.
Main tool box is closed If on, the application is unloaded when the
TerraModeler toolbox is closed.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Quantity calculation > 73

Quantity calculation category

Quantity calculation category defines how small elevation differences are ignored in quantity
calculation and settings for quantity reports.

SETTING EFFECT
Less than Accuracy limit for quantity calculation tools.
If the elevation difference between two
surfaces is less than the limit, this column is
ignored.
Volume Accuracy of volume values in quantity
reports.
Area Accuracy of area values in quantity report.
Max usage Maximum amount of memory used for
creating quantity reports.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Saving surface > 74

Saving surfaces category

Saving surfaces category defines when surface models are saved automatically to the surface
file on a hard disk.

SETTING EFFECT
When first created Save surfaces automatically when the surface
is first created.
When saving design file Save surfaces automatically when saving the
CAD file.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Surface types > 75

Surface types category

Surface types category displays a list of user defined surface types. Typical surface types are
ground, plan, bedrock, and various soil layers. Whenever you create a new surface, you have to
select a surface type from which the surface gets predefined symbology settings for profiles
and colored triangles.

You can use the Edit button to modify settings for an existing surface type. The button opens
the Surface type dialog which lets you adjust settings for this surface type. With the Delete
button an existing surface type can be removed from the list.

To add or edit a surface type:

1. Open the Surface types category. Click Add in the Settings dialog.
OR

1. Open the Surface types category. Select a surface type definition and click Edit in the Settings
dialog.
This opens the Surface type dialog:

2. Type a Name for the surface type.

3. Select symbology settings for drawing the surface type into profiles.

4. Define settings for displaying the surface type as triangles.

5. Click OK to the Surface type dialog.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Surface types > 76

6. Close the Settings dialog in order to save the modified settings for TerraModeler.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > Triangulate survey > 77

Triangulate Survey category

Triangulate Survey tool creates a surface model from graphical elements created by a survey
drawing or a mapping application. The feature coding of this application is used when deciding
what elements can be used as valid source data for the selected surface. Other tools and
commands using these settings are Triangulate Multiple Sources, Produce contours, Produce
lattice models and Produce triangles.

The settings in Triangulate Survey category determine what applications can be called to
inquire if an element represents valid data for the selected surface. An application can be
called only if it is installed on the computer. An exception is TerraSurvey which does not have
to be installed on the computer.

SETTING EFFECT
TerraSurvey If on, use elements created by TerraSurvey.
Accept by How to determine suitability of elements:
· Active feature list - call TerraSurvey to
inquire suitability of an element based on
the current feature list.
· Creation time settings - do not call
TerraSurvey. Elements created by
TerraSurvey may be accepted for the surface
model based on information stored with the
elements at creation time.
Scan reference files If on, the application checks reference files
attached to the active CAD file for graphical
elements in order to create a surface model.

You do not have to have TerraSurvey installed to use its feature coding to filter elements for
a surface model. When TerraSurvey creates survey drawing elements, it stores the active
modeling settings of this feature as attribute data. TerraModeler knows how to interpret the
data and can select elements based on the creation time modeling settings.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TerraModeler Settings > View elevation > 78

View Elevation category

View Elevation category defines how the Points on surface lock in View Elevation tool works if
a new element is snapped to another CAD file element.

SETTING EFFECT
Apply to snapped points If on, the elevation value derived from the
surface given in the View Elevation tool’s
dialog is applied for all data points, no matter
if they are snapped to other 3D elements or
not. Thus, the snap determines only the xy
location of the data point.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

2D Contours toolbox > > 79

2D Contours toolbox
The 2D Contours toolbox is used to lift 2D contour elements into 3D or to validate elevations of
linear elements.

TO USE TOOL

Lift 2D contours using contour labeling Lift 2D Contours

Set elevation of a contour element Set Contour Elevation

Validate elevations of linear elements Check Linear Elevations

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

2D Contours toolbox > Check Linear Elevations > 80

Check Linear Elevations

Not Spatix

Check Linear Elevations tool validates the elevations of selected linear elements. It marks
invalid elements by modifying level and color of the elements.

To check elevations of linear elements:

1. Select element(s) to check.

2. Select the Check Linear Elevations tool.

This opens the Check Linear Elevations dialog:

3. Define settings.

4. Accept the selection with a data click.

This modifies all elements defined by the fence mode that violate the given criteria.

SETTING EFFECT
Mark elements Defines invalid elements:
· Above elevation - mark elements which
extend above a given Elevation.
· Below elevation - mark elements which
extend below a given Elevation.
· With non-uniform elevations - mark
elements which have vertices at more than
one elevation.
Elevation Defines the elevation limit for valid elements.
This is only active if Mark elements is set to
Above elevation or Below elevation.
Find connected elements If on, the application tries to find linear
elements which connect exactly to the start or
the end point of a line element. These
connected elements are validated as well.
This is only active if Mark elements is set to
With non-uniform elevations.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

2D Contours toolbox > Check Linear Elevations > 81

SETTING EFFECT
Level If on, move invalid elements to the given
level.
Color If on, set invalid elements to the given color.
Uses the active color table in MicroStation.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

2D Contours toolbox > Lift 2D Contours > 82

Lift 2D Contours
Lift 2D Contours tool converts two-dimensional contour elements into three-dimensional
contours. The original elements are copied to their new elevation. The correct contour
elevation is determined by a text element used as contour label.

The tool scans the given levels in either the active CAD file or in attached reference files
(MicroStation only) for text and linear elements. It tries to find a matching contour elevation label
for each contour chain. A match is found, if the start or the end point of a contour chain is close
to an elevation label.

To lift 2D contours into 3D:

1. Select the Lift 2D Contours tool.
This opens the Lift 2D Contours dialog:

2. Define settings for lifting 2D line and text elements.

3. Click Settings to define levels and symbology for lifted contours.

This opens the Contour Symbology dialog:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

2D Contours toolbox > Lift 2D Contours > 83

4. Define settings for Contour intervals, Levels and symbology (color, line style, line weight).

5. Click OK to close Contour Symbology dialog.

6. Click OK in the Lift 2D Contours dialog.

TerraModeler scans the given levels in the specified files for text and linear elements. These
are drawn at their new elevation in the active CAD file using the given contour symbology.

SETTING EFFECT
File Files from which to search for text and linear
elements:
· Active design file - scan the active CAD file.
· Reference files - scan all reference files
with Locate setting on in MicroStation
Reference file manager. (MicroStation only)
Levels List of levels from which to scan for elements.
For example:
· 61 - scan level 61.
· 15,21-24 - scan levels 15, 21, 22, 23 and 24.

Labeled contours If on, lift contours for which a matching label

is available.
Unlabeled contours If on, copy linear elements for which no
elevation value is found. The elements are
copied to zero elevation.
Labels If on, the contour label text elements are
lifted with the contour lines.
Set symbology If on, modify the symbology of the lifted
elements according to settings defined using

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

2D Contours toolbox > Lift 2D Contours > 84

SETTING EFFECT
the Settings button.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

2D Contours toolbox > Set Contour Elevation > 85

Set Contour Elevation

Set Contour Elevation tool lifts a linear element to a given elevation. It is designed to be used
for lifting single two-dimensional contour elements to a correct elevation. It can be applied to
line, shape and text elements. The original elements are moved to their new elevation.

To set elevation of contour element(s):

1. Select the Set Contour Elevation tool.
The Set Contour Elevation dialog opens:

2. Set an elevation value in the Elevation field.

3. Click Settings to define level and symbology for the lifted contour.
This opens the Contour Symbology dialog:

4. Define settings for Contour intervals, Levels and symbology (color, line style, line weight).

5. Click OK to close Contour Symbology dialog.

6. Identify the element to lift with a data click.

7. Accept the element with another data click.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

2D Contours toolbox > Set Contour Elevation > 86

The element is lifted to the given elevation. You can continue with steps 2, 3, or 6.

SETTING EFFECT
Elevation Elevation value for the lifted contour
element. Use the arrow buttons to change to
a new elevation value in steps defined next
to the arrow buttons.
Find connected elements If on, the application tries to find linear
elements which connect exactly to the start
or the end point of the identified line
element. These connected elements are
lifted as well.
Set level and symbology If on, modify the symbology of lifted
elements according to settings defined using
Settings button.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Create Surfaces toolbox > > 87

Create Surfaces toolbox

The tools in the Create Surfaces toolbox are used create surface models or to add new points to
an existing surface model.

TO USE TOOL

Triangulate survey elements Triangulate Survey

Triangulate elements visible in a view Triangulate View

Triangulate elements by type and level Triangulate Elements

Insert elements as random points Insert Random Elements

Insert elements as breaklines Insert Breakline Element

Triangulate breaklines and/or laser points Triangulate Multiple Sources

Rebuild models Rebuild Models

TerraModeler surface models are stored as triangulated surface files. A description of the file
format can be found in Chapter TIN File Format Specification.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Create Surfaces toolbox > Creating a Surface Model > 88

Creating a Surface Model

TerraModeler provides a number of tools for surface model creation. The source data may be
different as well as the first steps of the creation workflow. They are described for the
individual tools. At some point, the workflow becomes the same for all tools. The steps
described here are the same for all model creation processes.

To continue creating a surface model:

1. Follow the steps for the individual tools to start the surface model creation.
After the tool-specific steps, the Triangulate surface dialog opens:

2. Select the surface to be triangulated. You can select a new surface or an existing surface that
is loaded in TerraModeler.

3. If required, select additional settings for excluding triangles and point handling.

4. Click OK.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Determines how the surface is created:
· New surface - a new surface is created.
· <surface name> - new features are added to
an existing surface model that is loaded in
TerraModeler.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Create Surfaces toolbox > Creating a Surface Model > 89

SETTING EFFECT
Create as profile model If on, the surface is created from a centerline
element. TerraModeler internally copies the
element to the left and right, and uses these
elements for surface creation.
Exclude outer boundaries Exclusion method of outer boundary triangles
of the surface model:
· No exclusion - no triangles are excluded.
· Default exclusion - the software computes a
reasonable triangle length for exclusion
from the surface’s point density.
· By key-in length - triangles with edge
lengths given in the subsequent Longer than
field are excluded.
Exclude any long triangles If on, any triangles with edge lengths longer
than the value given in the subsequent Longer
than field are excluded.
Ignore point too close to another If on, the model is thinned by leaving out
unnecessary points. If the distance between
two points is less than Minimum point
distance, one of the points is left out.
Generate points along breakline If on, the model is improved by generating
new points along any long breaklines. Points
are generated at a distance given in the Every
field.
Filter error points If on, probable survey errors are filtered out
from the model. Points that have been
filtered out are drawn as small circles on the
level defined in the Draw on level field.

If a new surface is created, the software opens the Surface Settings dialog:

5. Select a surface Type and type a Name for the surface.

6. (Optional) Rename the File for storing the model on the hard disk.

7. Click OK.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Create Surfaces toolbox > Creating a Surface Model > 90

TerraModeler creates the surface model. A progress bar shows the process. After the process
is finished, the time needed for the creation process is displayed in the status bar of the CAD
platform.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Create Surfaces toolbox > Insert Breakline Element > 91

Insert Breakline Element

Insert Breakline Element tool adds graphical elements as breakline points to a surface model.
You can use this tool to create a surface model or to add points to an existing model loaded in
TerraModeler.

Before inserting a 3D breakline element to an existing surface model, the line element
representing the breakline must be dropped to the surface elevation. This should be done with
the Drop element to surface tool in order to ensure that the software can recognize the
intersection points between the existing TIN and the new breakline element. Thus, TIN edges
are broken correctly by the new breakline.

In general, it might be more convenient to create a new surface model from all available
sources instead of inserting new elements to an already existing model.

To insert element(s) as breakline points to a surface:

1. Select the Insert Breakline Element tool.
This opens the Insert Breakline Element dialog:

2. Select a Surface and a breakline Type.

3. (Optional) Define additional settings related to minimum distance between points or

generation of additional points along the breakline.

4. Identify the element to insert with a data click.

5. Accept the element with another data click.

TerraModeler inserts the element to the surface. You can continue to step 4.
OR

1. Select element(s) to insert.

2. Select the Insert Breakline Elements tool.

This opens the Insert Breakline Element dialog.

3. Define settings.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Create Surfaces toolbox > Insert Breakline Element > 92

4. Accept the selected element(s) with a data click.

TerraModeler inserts the element(s) to the surface.
If a new surface is created, the Triangulate surface dialog opens. Follow the common steps
for Creating a surface model.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Surface to which breakline points are
inserted:
· New surface - a new surface is created.
· <surface name> - points are added to an
existing surface model that is loaded in
TerraModeler.
Type Defines how the element vertices are used as
points in the surface model. See Breakline
types.
Ignore point too close to another If on, filter out unnecessary points. If the
distance between two points is less than
Minimum point distance, one of the points is
left out.
Generate points along breakline If on, the model is improved by generating
new points along any long breaklines. Points
are generated at a distance given in the Every
field.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Create Surfaces toolbox > Insert Random Elements > 93

Insert Random Elements

Insert Random Elements tool adds graphical elements as random points to a surface model. You
can use this tool to create a surface model or to add points to an existing model loaded in
TerraModeler.

To insert element(s) as random points to a surface:

1. Select the Insert Random Elements tool.
This opens the Insert Random Element dialog:

2. Select a Surface and define a Minimum distance between points.

3. Identify the element to insert with a data click.

4. Accept the element with another data click.

TerraModeler inserts the element to the surface. You can continue with step 3.
OR

1. Select element(s) to insert.

2. Select the Insert Random Elements tool.

This opens the Insert Random Element dialog.

3. Define settings.

4. Accept the selected element(s) with a data click.

TerraModeler inserts the element(s) to the surface.
If a new surface is created, the Triangulate surface dialog opens. Follow the common steps
for Creating a surface model.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Surface to which points are inserted:
· New surface - a new surface is created.
· <surface name> - points are added to an
existing surface model that is loaded in
TerraModeler.
Minimum distance Thins the model by leaving out unnecessary
points. If the distance between two points is

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Create Surfaces toolbox > Insert Random Elements > 94

SETTING EFFECT
less than Minimum distance, one of the points
is left out.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Create Surfaces toolbox > Rebuild Models > 95

Rebuild Models
Rebuild Models tool is used to rebuild surface models that were created by the Triangulate
Multiple Sources tool. The models must have been created as Rebuildable models.

The rebuild process deletes the old surface, reads the source information, triangulates the new
surface, and redraws the display methods.

To rebuild a model:
1. Select the Rebuild Models tool.
If there are one or more rebuildable models loaded in TerraModeler, the rebuilding process
starts immediately for these models.
If there is no rebuildable model loaded in TerraModeler, an information message appears.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Create Surfaces toolbox > Triangulate Elements > 96

Triangulate Elements
Triangulate Elements tool creates a surface model from graphical elements filtered by level,
element type, and symbology. You can save the filtering rules to a text file for later use.

You can use this tool to create a surface model or to add points to an existing model loaded in
TerraModeler.

General procedure for triangulating elements by level and type:

1. Select the Triangulate Elements tool.
The Triangulate Elements window opens:

2. Create a list of Filtering rules for elements to be included in the model. Alternatively, you
can load a previously saved set of rules from a file on the hard disk.

3. Click Triangulate.
This opens the Triangulate surface dialog. Follow the common steps for Creating a surface
model.

Filtering rules

The Triangulate Elements window lists filtering rules for graphical elements in a CAD file. Each
filtering rule defines one element type located on a specific level to be accepted for the model.
Points extracted from the element can be used as random, breakline, contour, hole or
boundary points.

The filtering rules can be created manually or automatically by scanning the CAD file.

To save filtering rules into a text file, select Save as from the File pulldown menu.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Create Surfaces toolbox > Triangulate Elements > 97

To open a set of filtering rules from a file, select Load from the File pulldown menu.

To delete active rules or to create a new rule file, select New from the File pulldown menu. To
delete a selected rule from the list, select Delete from the Rule pulldown menu.

To add or edit a filtering rule to the list:

1. Select Add command from the Rule pulldown menu in the Triangulate Elements window.
OR

1. Select an existing rule. Select Edit command from the Rule pulldown menu in the Triangulate
Elements window.
This opens the Element Filtering Rule dialog:

2. Type a Name for the rule.

3. Select settings for defining the rule.

4. Click OK.
This adds the rule to the list or modifies the existing rule.

SETTING EFFECT
Name Description of the feature depicted by the
elements.
Level The rule applies to elements on this CAD file
level.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Create Surfaces toolbox > Triangulate Elements > 98

SETTING EFFECT
Type Element type the rule applies to.
Color If on, the rule applies only to elements with a
given line Color.
Weight If on, the rule applies only to elements with a
given line Weight.
Style If on, the rule applies only to elements with a
given line Style.
Point type Defines how the element vertices are used
as points in the surface model. See Breakline
types.

You can use the Selection tool as an aid for creating new rules. Select an example element
before choosing Add command from the Rule pulldown menu. This applies the type and
symbology of the selected element to the Element Filtering Rule dialog.

To add rules to the list by scanning the CAD file:

1. Select Create by scanning command from the File pulldown menu in the Triangulate
Elements window.
This opens the Create Rules by Scanning dialog:

2. Select settings and click OK.

3. If Scan is set to View contents, select the view with a data click.
The software adds the rules automatically to the list in the Triangulate Elements window.
You may edit the rules, add additional rules or delete unnecessary rules.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Create Surfaces toolbox > Triangulate Elements > 99

SETTING EFFECT
Scan Defines where the software scans elements to
create the rules:
· Design file - in the active CAD file.
· Design and references - in the active CAD
file and in reference files attached to the
active CAD file. References are applicable in
MicroStation only.
· View contents - in a selected view. Only
elements visible in the selected view are
used for rule creation.
Keep current rules If on, the new rules are added to the existing
rules.
If off, existing rules are deleted.
Color If on, rules are distinguished by element
color.
Weight If on, rules are distinguished by element
weight.
Style If on, rules are distinguished by element style.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Create Surfaces toolbox > Triangulate Multiple Sources > 100

Triangulate Multiple Sources

Triangulate Multiple Sources tool creates a new surface model from breakline elements and/or
point cloud data in one operation. The surface model can be created as:

· Normal model - the model can not be rebuild when the source data has been changed.
· Rebuildable model - the surface model can be rebuild after the source data has been
changed by using the Rebuild Models tool.
· Editable model - the surface model is updated if there are modifications of the laser points
used in the model. This requires the usage of points loaded in TerraScan.
The breaklines can be defined as vector elements filtered by rules. See Filtering rules for more
information about rule files and how to create them. Alternatively, breaklines can be derived
from survey elements created by TerraSurvey or other applications enabled in Triangulate
Survey category of the TerraModeler Settings.

Point cloud data can be used from points loaded in TerraScan or directly from a TerraScan binary
file stored on a hard disk.

To create a surface model from multiple sources:

1. Select the Triangulate Multiple Sources tool.
This opens the Triangulate Multiple Sources dialog:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Create Surfaces toolbox > Triangulate Multiple Sources > 101

2. Define settings for the surface model creation.

3. Select data sources and define settings.

4. Click OK.
This opens the Triangulate surface dialog. Follow the common steps for Creating a surface
model.

SETTING EFFECT
Create As Defines surface model rebuild options:
· Normal model - the model can not be
rebuild.
· Rebuildable model - the model can be
rebuild after changes to the source data
using the Rebuild Models tool.
Type Surface model type.
Name Name of the new surface model.
File name Name of the surface model file stored on the
hard disk.
Vector elements If on, breaklines are included in the model.
The breaklines are defined by vector
elements and the given Rule file.
Survey elements If on, breaklines are included in the model.
The breaklines are defined by TerraSurvey or
any other application enabled in
TerraModeler Settings.
Laser points in TerraScan If on, laser points loaded in TerraScan are
included in the model. Only points of the
given Classes are included.
Make this ‘Editable model’ If on, the model created from the laser points
is updated if the point class changes. Only
active if Laser points in TerraScan is switched
on.
Run preprocessing macro If on, the given TerraScan Macro is applied to
the loaded points before the surface model is
created. Only active if Laser points in
TerraScan is switched on.
Laser points from binary file If on, laser points from the given TerraScan
binary File stored on a hard disk are included
in the model.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Create Surfaces toolbox > Triangulate Survey > 102

Triangulate Survey
Triangulate Survey tool creates a surface model from survey data that has been drawn into the
CAD file with survey drawing or mapping applications. The feature coding of this other
application is used to decide what elements can be accepted as valid data for the TerraModeler
surface model.

The elements may originate from one of the supported applications:

· TerraSurvey - a survey drawing application developed by Terrasolid.

· PRO600 - a mapping application developed by Leica.
· DigiCad - a map digitizing application developed by GeoCad.
· Espa - a mapping application developed by ESPA Systems Ltd.

The applications must be activated in Triangulate Survey category of TerraModeler Settings

before the software can create surface models from the respective survey data. More
information about the implementation of functions related to survey feature coding in other
applications can be found in Section Triangulate Survey.

You can use this tool to create a new surface model or to add points to an existing model loaded
in TerraModeler.

To triangulate survey elements:

1. Select the Triangulate Survey tool.
The Triangulate surface dialog opens. Follow the common steps for Creating a surface model.
TerraModeler scans the CAD file for survey elements and uses those to create a model.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Create Surfaces toolbox > Triangulate View > 103

Triangulate View
Triangulate View tool creates a surface model from graphical elements displayed in a view. This
tool uses only elements residing on levels visible in the selected view and located inside the
view range.

This tool includes closed elements as breakline points or holes, linear elements as breakline or
contour points, and single point elements as random points into a surface model.

You can use this tool to create a new surface model or to add points to an existing model loaded
in TerraModeler.

To triangulate view elements:

1. Select the Triangulate View tool.
This opens the Triangulate View dialog:

2. Identify the view to triangulate by a mouse click inside the view.

This opens the Triangulate surface dialog. Follow the common steps for Creating a surface
model.
The software creates the surface model from elements that are visible in the selected view.

SETTING EFFECT
Closed elements How to use closed elements: As breaklines ,
As 3D holes or As 2D holes.
Curve elements How to use curve elements: As breaklines or
As contours.
B-spline elements How to use B-splines: As breaklines or As
contours.
Other linear elements Other linear elements are always used as
breaklines.
Single point elements Single point elements are always used as
random points.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Create Surfaces toolbox > Triangulate View > 104

SETTING EFFECT
Scan reference files If on, elements in reference files that are
attached to the active CAD file are used for
surface creation as well.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Regions toolbox > > 105

Display Regions toolbox

Not Lite

The tools in the Display Regions toolbox are used to generate region-based displays from a
surface model.

These display methods rely on fairly complex computations which are performed when you
start a tool. The created display elements are not updated after modifications of a surface if the
tool is run again or by the Update Displays tool.

TO USE TOOL

Display rain water flow on surface Display Drainage Not Lite

Display theme polygons colored by Display Themes Not Lite, Not UAV
elevation, slope, or domain

Display triangles colored by region Display Region Triangles Not Lite, Not UAV
boundaries

Display triangles with raster materials Display Raster Triangles Not Lite

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Regions toolbox > Display Drainage > 106

Display Drainage
Not Lite

Display Drainage tool computes and displays the flow of drainage water on a surface model. It
uses a grid-based approach to determine the water flow.

The process starts by placing an imaginary rain drop at each grid cell. Then the software
determines where that rain drop would travel. It compares the elevation of the cell center
point with the elevation of each of the neighboring cells. If a lower elevation is found, the rain
drop travels to the neighboring cell to which the slope is steepest. This process continues until
each of the rain drops have reached a pit or a local minimum elevation point.

Display Drainage tool creates CAD file elements which are not linked to a surface model. Thus,
TerraModeler is not able to update or erase elements created by this tool.

To display drainage:
1. Select the Display Drainage tool.
The Display Drainage dialog opens:

2. Define settings and click OK.

3. If Enter origin is switched on, define the origin point of a drainage grid cell with a data point.
This computes the drainage water flow and displays the results temporarily in all open
views. The display is updated every time when the view contents is updated with the
corresponding CAD tool.
In addition, the Drainage Detail dialog opens for Viewing the drainage system in detail.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Grid size Size of the grid cells for drainage
computation.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Regions toolbox > Display Drainage > 107

SETTING EFFECT
Level Number of the level in the CAD file on which
the drainage network is drawn if it is drawn
permanently into the CAD file.
Color Color of the lines and arrows the represent
the water flow. Uses the CAD file color table.
Inside fence If on, the drainage system is only displayed
inside a fence. This is only active if a polygon
has been selected or a fence has been drawn
before the tool is started.
Enter origin If on, you can enter the origin point of a
drainage grid cell with another data point.

Viewing the drainage system in detail

The drainage display shows the paths that rain drops would travel according to the grid-based
calculation. The arrows show the flow direction and the line width gives an indication on how
many rain drops travel along a path. Red squares mark places where drainage water would
gather (outlet, pour point). As the rain drops can not travel outside the surface model, there
may be several squares at the outer edges of the model.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Regions toolbox > Display Drainage > 108

The Drainage Detail dialog allows you to control the level of detail in the drainage display.

When the slider is set to High, the drainage display shows the paths of each single rain drop. If
you move the slider closer to Low, the software leaves out smaller streams and only displays
the major paths. The drainage network remains visible as long as you keep the Drainage Detail
dialog open.

In addition, the Show area button in the Drainage Detail dialog can be used to identify the
runoff area for a selected drainage grid cell.

Click on the Write to design button in order to draw the drainage display permanently into the
CAD file.

To view a runoff area:

1. Click on the Show area button in the Drainage Detail dialog.

2. Move the mouse inside a view.

The size of the Runoff area for the grid square at the mouse pointer location is displayed in
the Drainage Detail dialog. This is the combined surface area of all the squares from which a
rain drop travels to or through the selected grid cell.

3. (Optional) Enter a data point in order to display the boundaries of the runoff area.
This draws the runoff area as a shape element into the CAD file using the active symbology.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Regions toolbox > Display Raster Triangles > 109

Display Raster Triangles

Not Lite

Display Raster Triangles tool displays triangles in a manner suitable for rendered images. The
triangles are used by TerraPhoto in order to drape images on a surface model in rendered
views. The images have to be attached as raster references in TerraPhoto.

The raster triangles are not drawn permanently into the CAD file and they remain linked to the
surface model. This allows TerraModeler to update the display after modifications and to erase
the display using the Erase Display tool.

To display raster triangles:

1. Select the Display Raster Triangles tool.
This opens the Display Raster Triangles dialog:

2. Define settings and click OK.

This displays the triangles. You can now use TerraPhoto tools to create rendered views.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Level Name of the level in the CAD file on which
the raster triangles are drawn.
Color Color used to draw the raster triangles. Uses
the active CAD file color table.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Regions toolbox > Display Region Triangles > 110

Display Region Triangles

Not Lite, Not UAV

Display Region Triangles tool displays the triangles of a surface model. The triangles are colored
by regions which are defined by closed shape elements. The triangles and the parts of triangles
falling inside each region are drawn using the color of the boundary shape. The tool may be
used to visualize, for example, land use regions, soil type regions or property boundaries.

Display Region Triangles tool creates CAD file elements which are not linked to a surface
model. Thus, TerraModeler is not able to update or erase elements created by this tool.

To display region triangles:

1. Select region boundary shapes.

2. Select the Display Region Triangles tool.

This opens the Display Region Triangles dialog:

3. Define settings and click OK.

This writes triangles colored by region into the CAD file.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Level Number of the level in the CAD file on which
region triangles are drawn.
Draw triangles outside regions If on, triangles which are outside all selected
boundary shapes are drawn using the given
Color.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Regions toolbox > Display Themes > 111

Display Themes
Not Lite, Not UAV

Display Themes tool creates colored shape elements to display theme areas in a surface model.
Each theme area can represent an elevation range, a slope range, or a domain which has been
assigned a distinctive color.

The result of theme coloring is very similar to the visualization created by Display Triangles
tool. Both create elevation-based representations of a surface model which may look exactly
the same when viewed in a top view. Display Themes tool has the advantage of creating only
one shape element for each elevation or slope range. This results in a much smaller CAD file
size compared with the triangle visualization approach which is advantageous especially in
dynamic views.

Display Themes tool creates CAD file elements which are not linked to a surface model. Thus,
TerraModeler is not able to update or erase elements created by this tool.

To display theme areas:

1. Select the Display Themes tool.
The Display Themes dialog opens:

2. Define settings and click OK.

The theme areas are drawn as filled shape elements into the CAD file.

3. If Place legend is switched on, define the location of drawing the legend with another data
point.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Color by Defines the content of the theme areas:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Regions toolbox > Display Themes > 112

SETTING EFFECT

· Elevation - each theme area represents an

elevation range.
· Slope - each theme area represent a slope
range.
· Domain - creates theme polygons from
neighboring triangles assigned to the same
domain. See Define Domains tool for more
information.
Draw as Defines the shape type of theme areas:
· 3d shapes - the shapes follow the surface
model elevation.
· 2d shapes - the shapes are plane and drawn
at zero elevation.
Level Number of the level in the CAD file on which
the theme area shapes are drawn.
Colors Opens the Color scheme dialog. See Creating a
color scheme of discrete colors for more
information.
Color list left of the color scheme preview Opens the CAD file color table for single color
selection.
Place legend If on, a legend for the theme colors can be
placed in the CAD file. This is only active if a
color scheme is defined.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Single toolbox > > 113

Display Single toolbox

Not Lite

The tools in the Display Single toolbox are used to place single contours, elevation texts, or
slope arrows. There is another tool for modifying the symbology of contour lines.

TO USE TOOL

Place a contour at a single elevation Place Contour

Place an elevation text Place Elevation Text

Place a slope arrow Place Slope Arrow

Modify symbology of contours at given Modify Contour Symbology

intervals

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Single toolbox > Modify Contour Symbology > 114

Modify Contour Symbology

Not Lite

Modify Contour Symbology tool modifies the symbology of contour lines that are already
drawn in the CAD file. It can also move contour lines to another level in the CAD file. The
contour lines have to be created with Mode set to Write to file in the Display Contours tool in
order to apply the tool.

The tool may be useful, for example, if contour lines need to be distinguished into more than
three types that are supported by the Display Contours tool.

To modify the symbology of contours:

1. Select the Modify Contour Symbology tool.
This opens the Modify Contour Symbology dialog:

2. Define settings and click OK.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Interval Interval of contour lines that are modified.
Set contour level If on, the contour lines are moved to the
given CAD file Level.
Set contour symbology If on, the color, style and weight of the
contour lines are modified to the given

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Single toolbox > Modify Contour Symbology > 115

SETTING EFFECT
Symbology. Uses the active color table of the
CAD file, and CAD file line styles and weights.
Set label level If on, the contour labels are moved to the
given CAD file Level.
Set label symbology If on, the color, style, and weight of the
contour labels are modified to the given
Symbology. Uses the active color table of the
CAD file, and CAD file line styles and weights.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Single toolbox > Place Contour > 116

Place Contour
Not Lite

Place Contour tool draws a contour at a single elevation. The tool detects the surface elevation
at the mouse pointer position and draws contour lines for this elevation.

The contour lines are drawn using the active level and symbology settings in the CAD file.

You can place the contour at a precise elevation by locking the elevation to a key-in value.

To place a single contour:

1. Select the Place Contour tool.
The Place Contour dialog opens:

2. Define settings.

3. Move the mouse inside a view.

A preview of the contour running at the mouse pointer location is dynamically displayed.

4. Confirm the contour with a data click.

This draws the contour(s) into the CAD file. You can continue with steps 2 or 3.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Create Defines which contour lines are drawn:
· Only one - only the contour line at the
mouse pointer location is drawn.
· All chains - all contour lines at the elevation
of the mouse pointer location are drawn.
Draw as Element type of the contour lines:
· Curves - smooth elements for which the
software computes the curvature, compact
elements.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Single toolbox > Place Contour > 117

SETTING EFFECT

· Line strings - sharp elements, suitable for

preview.
Elevation If on, contours are drawn at the given
elevation.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Single toolbox > Place Elevation Text > 118

Place Elevation Text

Not Lite

Place Elevation Text tool places a single elevation text. It shows the surface elevation at a given
location. The tool can be used to label the difference between two surfaces as well.

Text font, size, and numeric format are determined by leveling point settings in Elevation
labels category of the TerraModeler Settings. The settings also define the location of the label
relative to the exact elevation point and if a point marker is set at the location of the elevation
point. The label is drawn using active level and symbology settings in the CAD file.

To place a single elevation text:

1. Select the Place Elevation Text tool.
This opens the Place Elevation Text dialog:

2. Define settings.

3. Move the mouse pointer inside a view.

A preview of the label at the mouse pointer location is dynamically displayed.

4. Confirm the elevation text location with a data click.

The elevation label is drawn into the CAD file. You can continue with steps 2 or 3.

SETTING EFFECT
Write Defines the type of the label:
· Elevation - the elevation value of a surface
model is drawn.
· Difference - the elevation difference
between two surface models is drawn.
Surface Surface model for which a label is placed. If
Write is set to Difference, the surface is used
as lower surface for the difference calculation.
- If Write is set to Difference, the second
surface is used as upper surface for the
difference calculation.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Single toolbox > Place Slope Arrow > 119

Place Slope Arrow

Not Lite

Place Slope Arrow tool places a single slope arrow. The slope arrow shows the direction of
water flow at a given location. The arrow length indicates the steepness of the surface at that
location.

The shape of the slope arrows can be defined in Place Slope Arrow / Arrows category of the
TerraModeler Settings. It is further determined by the active symbology settings in the CAD
file. In addition, a label showing the gradient of the slope can be placed for each slope arrow.
The label settings are defined in Place Slope Arrow / Labels category of the TerraModeler
Settings.

To place a single slope arrow:

1. Select the Place Slope Arrow tool.
This opens the Place Slope Arrow dialog:

2. Select a Surface model for which slope arrows are placed.

3. Move the mouse pointer inside a view.

The slope arrow is dynamically displayed at the mouse pointer location.

4. Confirm the arrow location with a data click.

A slope arrow is drawn at the given location. You can continue with steps 2 or 3.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > > 120

Display Surface toolbox

The tools in the Display Surface toolbox are used to generate displays from a surface model.

The first six tools generate different visualizations of a surface model. TerraModeler is capable
of generating contours, colored triangles, a colored grid, elevation texts, slope arrows, or a
shaded surface. The first five display methods can be drawn as permanent elements into the
CAD file or as temporary elements which are not saved with the CAD file. A shaded surface is
always drawn temporarily.

All six display methods can be updated after modifications to the surface model,using the
Update Displays tool. The visualizations can be removed from display by using the Erase Display
tool.

Display Boundary tool and Label Peaks and Pits tool create elements which are not updated
with the Update Displays tool or removed by the Erase Display tool.

TO USE TOOL

Display contours Display Contours

Display colored triangles Display Triangles

Display colored grid Display Grid

Display elevation as grid spaced texts Display Elevation Texts

Display grid spaced slope arrows Display Slopes

Display coloring by elevation and sun angle Display Shaded Surface Not Lite

Update displays after surface modification Update Displays

Erase contours, triangles or grid Erase Display

Display surface model boundary Display Boundary

Label local minimum and maximum points Label Peaks and Pits

Display modes

TerraModeler supports two different modes in which surface displays may be generated.

Write to file mode adds the created elements to the CAD file. This has the disadvantage of
increasing the CAD file size quite substantially with some display methods. Very large surface

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > > 121

models may result in CAD files which are very cumbersome for processing with CAD tools or for
display in dynamic views. The advantages include the option to manipulate the elements using
CAD tools and the ability to save the display on a hard disk as a part of the CAD file.

Preview mode recalculates and draws the display elements each time a view is updated. This
display mode does neither increase the CAD file size nor consume any RAM space. The mode is
supported only by tools which can quickly re-calculate the whole display.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Creating a color scheme > 122

Creating a color scheme of discrete colors

There are several display tools in TerraModeler that enable the definition of color schemes
from discrete colors for surface model display. The Coloring scheme dialog is used to create
such a coloring scheme by assigning colors for different elevations. The dialog uses the active
color table of the CAD file.

The vertical bar on the left shows all the colors currently assigned in the scheme. Each color
boundary has a label displaying the elevation value where that color change occurs. The text
label is black, if the elevation value is fixed to the color boundary. A white elevation value has
not been fixed and is recalculated if you change the number of colors in the scheme.

From the coloring scheme dialog, you can save a coloring scheme file to a hard disk.

To assign a new color:

1. Click on one of the available colors in the color table on the right.
This adds the new color at the lower end of the Colors bar and recalculates all unfixed
elevation boundaries.

To fix an elevation boundary:

1. Click on the text label of the elevation boundary.
This opens the Change Color at Boundary dialog:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Creating a color scheme > 123

2. Type an elevation value in the Boundary field.

The color will change at this value.

To create a new color scheme:

1. Select Remove all command from the Color pulldown menu in the Coloring scheme dialog.
This removes all assigned colors from the current color bar.

2. Assign new colors to the color bar as described above.

Each color is added to the lower end of the bar, thus, the first color is assigned to the highest
elevation value.

3. (Optional) Save the color scheme as a file on a hard disk using the Save as command from the
File pulldown menu in the Coloring scheme dialog.

USE MENU ITEM TO

File - Open Open a previously saved coloring scheme
file.
File - Save As Save the coloring scheme to a file.
Color - Add empty Add an empty color which is not drawn.
Color - Remove last Remove last color from the coloring scheme.
Color - Remove all Remove all colors from the coloring scheme.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Boundary > 124

Display Boundary
Display Boundary tool draws a boundary shape of a surface model. This can be used to outline
the area covered by the surface model.

To display the boundary of a surface model:

1. Select the Display Boundary tool.

2. This opens the Display Boundary dialog:

3. Select the Surface you want to display.

4. Move the mouse pointer inside a view.

The boundaries of the selected surface model are highlighted.

5. (Optional) Select a view with a data click to draw the boundary shape permanently in to the
CAD file and/or to fit the view to the surface model.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Draw permanently If on, the surface boundary is drawn as shape
into the CAD file when you enter a data point
in a view.
Fit view by surface If on, the software fits the view to the
surface area when you enter a data point.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Contours > 125

Display Contours
Display Contours tool draws contour lines for a surface model. You can generate quick contours
which are suitable for verifying the surface model or higher-quality contours to be plotted on
paper.

The tool can also be used to save a contour settings file that is required for producing contour
lines automatically in a batch process. The settings file stores all information related to contour
lines, labels, and ticks, except the name of the surface model. See Utility / Produce contours for
more information.

Contours can be drawn as:

· Curves - smooth elements for which the software computes the curvature. This results in
fairly compact elements but can cause contours to intersect each other.
· Line strings - sharp elements suitable for mathematical design surfaces or for surface
verification.
· Soft line strings - smooth elements for which TerraModeler computes the smoothing by
inserting additional vertices. This results in quite complex elements.
TerraModeler supports three different types of contours. Minor, Basic and Major contours can
be distinguished from each other by line color, weight, or style. You can select which of the
contour types is displayed and at what intervals. If more than three contour types have to be
distinguished, you may use the Modify Contour Symbology tool in order to assign a different
level and symbology to contours that are already drawn into the CAD file.

In addition to the contour lines, the software can create labels and ticks for the contours.
Further, depressions can be displayed using different symbology settings than for hills. Labels,
ticks, and depression line symbology are available in display modes Write to file, but not in
Preview mode.

To display contours:
1. Select the Display Contours tool.
The Display Contours dialog opens:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Contours > 126

2. Define settings for contour generation.

3. Define settings for the symbology of contour lines, labels, and ticks. This can be done using
commands Contour options, Contour label options, and Contour tick options from the
Options pulldown menu in the Display contours dialog.
OR

3. Load a previously saved settings file into the dialog using the Load settings command from
the File pulldown menu.

4. (Optional) Save the settings into a file on a hard disk by using the Save settings As command
from the File pulldown menu.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Contours > 127

Click Cancel to the Display contours dialog if you just want to save a contour settings file for
automatic contour line production.

5. Click OK to the Display contours dialog.

6. If Place legend is switched on, define the location of drawing the legend with a data click.
The contours for the selected surface model are displayed.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Mode Display mode for contour lines:
· Write to file - elements are written and
stored in the CAD file.
· Preview - elements are recalculated and
redrawn whenever the view is updated.
Draw as Element type of the contour lines:
· Curves - smooth elements for which the
software computes the curvature, may
overlap each other, compact elements. This
is only active if Mode is set to Write to file.
· Line strings - sharp elements, suitable for
preview.
· Soft line strings - smooth elements for
which TerraModeler computes smoothing,
best quality, large elements. This is only
active if Mode is set to Write to file.
Minor contours If on, minor contours are drawn at Every
distance.
Basic contours If on, basic contours are drawn at Every
distance.
Major contours If on, major contours are drawn at Every
distance.
Ticks If on, ticks are drawn along contour lines. This
is only active if Mode is set to Write to file.
Automatic labels If on, labels are drawn along contour lines.
This is only active if Mode is set to Write to
file.
Inside fence only If on, contours are displayed only inside a
selected polygon or fence. This is only active if
Mode is set to Write to file.
Write attributes If on, the software writes the contour
elements in a way that enables the update of
the contours using the Update Displays tool
and the removal of contours using the Erase

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Contours > 128

SETTING EFFECT
Display tool. This is only active if Inside fence
only is switched on.
Place legend If on, a legend for contour line symbology is
placed. This is only active if Color by is set to
Elevation in the Contour options dialog.
Views Switch on the CAD file views in which the
contours should be visible. This is only active
if Mode is set to Preview. Use the All on or All
off buttons in order to switch on/off the
visibility for all views.

Contour options

Contour options define symbology settings for contour lines, such as level, coloring, line style,
and line weight for the different contour types. They can also limit the contour display to
specific domains or an elevation range, define the minimum areas for closed contours, or
influence the way of contour line generation.

To define contour options:

1. Select Contours command from the Options pulldown menu in the Display contours dialog.
The Contour options dialog opens:.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Contours > 129

2. Define settings and click OK.

SETTING EFFECT
Color by Contour line coloring method:
· Contour type - different colors according to
the type of the contour line.
· Elevation - a coloring scheme is used for
coloring contour lines according to their
elevation value.
Colors Color scheme for coloring contours by their
elevation value. The color scheme is defined
using the Define button. See Creating a color
scheme of discrete colors for information
about how to create a coloring scheme. Only
active if Color by is set to Elevation.
Minor Level, color, line style and line weight for
minor contours of hills/depressions.
Basic Level, color, line style and line weight for
basic contours of hills/depressions.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Contours > 130

SETTING EFFECT
Major Level, color, line style and line weight for
major contours of hills/depressions.
Only selected domains If on, contours are only drawn for domains for
which the Draw contours option is switched
on. See Define Domains tool for more
information.
Only elevations If on, contours are drawn only for the given
elevation range.
Minimum area A closed contour line is not drawn, if the
enclosed surface area is smaller than
Minimum area. Separate settings for Hills and
Depressions. Helps to leave out unnecessary
detail.
Build complex chains If on, contours are drawn as complex chains or
as complex shapes.
Smoothing If on, contour vertices are slightly adjusted to
produce smoother lines. If off, contours pass
through triangle edges at mathematically
correct positions which may result in jagged
contour lines.
Thin by removing points if If on, some of the computed contour vertices
may be left out. This helps to minimize the
CAD file size when creating contours for large
surface models.
Distance A vertex can be left out if the distance
between the previous and the next remaining
vertex is smaller than this value. Only active if
Thin by removing points if is switched on.
Deviation A vertex can be left out if it is closer than this
distance value to the line segment connecting
the previous and the next remaining point.
Only active if Thin by removing points if is
switched on.
Turn angle A vertex can be left out if the contour
direction changes less than this value at the
vertex location. Only active if Thin by
removing points if is switched on.

Contour label options

Contour label options define the position of contour labels in relation to the contour lines, as
well as their symbology settings, and their text format.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Contours > 131

To define contour label options:

1. Select Contour labels command from the Options pulldown menu in the Display contours
dialog.
The Contour Label Options dialog opens:

2. Define settings and click OK.

SETTING EFFECT
Label Defines the contour line type(s) for
labeling: All contours, Major and basic
contours, or Major contours only.
Position Location where label text elements are
placed along a contour line:
· Above contour - above the contour line at
specified intervals.
· On contour - overlapping the contour line
at specified intervals.
· Below contour - below the contour line at
specified intervals.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Contours > 132

SETTING EFFECT

· At contour start - at the start point of a

contour chain.
Rotation Rotation of the label text element:
· Uphill - label is readable when looking
uphill.
· Downhill - label is readable when looking
downhill.
· North up - label is readable when looking
in north direction.
Every Distance between consecutive contour
labels. Given in meters along the contour.
Cut underlying contour If on, the contour line is cut under the label
text element.
bug in x64 TerraModeler: this option The line under a label text is drawn as a
causes a crash if it is switched on for MicroStation construction class element.
contour line production You can use view attributes to control the
visibility of the lines under label texts.
Further, you can use filtered selection in
order to select and delete the lines under
label texts.
Use Defines level and color settings for contour
labels:
· Contour level and color - a label is drawn
using level and color of its contour line
type (major, basic, or minor).
· Own settings - all labels are drawn using
the same level and color assigned to
labels.
Level Level and color of contour labels. This is
only active if Use is set to Own settings.
Style Line style of contour labels. This is only
active if Use is set to Own settings.
Weight Line weight of contour labels. This is only
active if Use is set to Own settings.
Prefix Prefix added at the beginning of each
contour label.
Suffix Suffix added at the end of each contour
label.
Accuracy Number of decimals shown in contour
labels.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Contours > 133

SETTING EFFECT
Display plus If on, the plus sign is displayed for positive
elevations.
Display minus If on, the minus sign is displayed for
negative elevations.

Contour tick options

Contour tick options define the position of ticks in relation to the contour lines, as well as the
format of the ticks.

To define contour tick options:

1. Select Contour ticks command from the Options pulldown menu in the Display contours
dialog.
The Contour Tick Options dialog opens:

2. Define settings and click OK.

SETTINGS EFFECT
Every Distance between consecutive contour ticks
given in meters along the contour.
Only depressions If on, ticks are drawn only for closed
depressions.
Maximum area If on, ticks are drawn only for closed
depressions smaller than a given area.
Draw as Shape of ticks: Line or Triangle.
Length Length of the tick line or triangle.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Elevation Texts > 134

Display Elevation Texts

Display Elevation Texts tool draws a grid of labels which display the surface elevation. The exact
location of the elevation can be marked by a point marker or by the decimal point of the
elevation text.

To display elevation texts:

1. Select the Display Elevation Texts tool.
The Display Elevation Texts dialog opens:

2. Define settings.

3. (Optional) Click on the Options button in order to open the Elevation text settings dialog and
define settings for elevation label symbology.

4. Click OK to the Display elevation texts dialog.

5. If Enter origin is switched on, enter the origin point of the grid with a data click.
This draws elevation texts for the selected surface model on the given level.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Mode Display mode for elevation texts:
· Write to file - elements are written and
stored in the CAD file.
Grid size Distance between elevation text locations.
Level Number of the level in the CAD file on which
elevation texts are drawn.
Enter origin If on, you can enter the origin point of the grid
with another data point. If the point is inside
the surface area, an elevation text is drawn at
this location.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Elevation Texts > 135

SETTING EFFECT
Options Opens the Elevation Text Settings dialog. See
Elevation text settings for more information.

Elevation text settings

The Elevation Text Settings dialog defines the symbology and other display options for
elevation texts created by the Display Elevation Texts tool.

SETTING EFFECT
Justify Location of the placement point (= point of
elevation measurement):
· Left, Center, Right | Top, Center, Bottom -
placement point location relative to the
label text box.
· Decimal point - placement point is located
on the decimal point.
Offset dx Offset between the placement point and the
label in x (left-right) direction. Given in
millimeters on paper. Not active if Justify is
set to Decimal point.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Elevation Texts > 136

SETTING EFFECT
Offset dy Offset between the placement point and the
label in y (up-down) direction. Given in
millimeters on paper. Not active if Justify is
set to Decimal point.
Symbology Color and line weight of the elevation text.
Uses the CAD file color table and line weights.
Font Font type of elevation texts. Uses font types
available in the CAD platform.
Size Text size of elevation texts. Given in
millimeters on paper.
Accuracy Number of decimals of elevation texts.
Display plus If on, the plus sign is displayed for positive
elevations.
Display minus If on, the minus sign is displayed for negative
elevations.
Point marker Type of the placement point marker:
· None - no point marker is drawn.
· Character - a given character is drawn as
point marker.
· Zero length line - a line element of zero
length (= point) is drawn as point marker.
Symbology Color and line weight of the point marker.
Uses the CAD file color table and line weights.
This is only active if Point marker is set to
Character or Zero length line.
Font Font type of the point marker character. Uses
font types available in the CAD platform. This
is only active if Point marker is set to
Character.
Size Text size of the point marker character. Given
in millimeters on paper. This is only active if
Point marker is set to Character.
Character Character used as point marker symbol. This is
only active if Point marker is set to Character.
Weight Weight of the point marker zero length line.
Uses CAD file line weights. This is only active
if Point marker is set to Zero length line.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Grid > 137

Display Grid
Display Grid tool generates a grid presentation of a surface model. You can create a coloring
scheme where the color of the grid squares changes according to the surface elevation.

To display a grid:
1. Select the Display Grid tool.
The Display Grid dialog opens:

2. Define settings and click OK.

3. If Enter origin is switched on, define the origin point of the grid with a data click.
This draws a squared grid for the selected surface model on the given level.

4. If Place legend is switched on, define the location of drawing the legend with another data
click.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Mode Display mode for the grid:
· Write to file - elements are written and
stored in the CAD file.
Grid size Size of rectangular squares in the grid.
Level Number of the level in the CAD file on which
the grid is drawn.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Grid > 138

SETTING EFFECT
Enter origin If on, you can enter the origin point of the grid
with another data point. If this point is inside
the surface area, it becomes a corner point of
the grid square at this location.
Create flat shapes If on, each grid square is drawn as flat square
at the elevation of its center point.
Create filled shapes If on the grid squares are filled with color.
Colors Opens the Color scheme dialog. See Creating a
color scheme of discrete colors for more
information.
Color list left of the color scheme preview Opens the CAD file color table for single color
selection.
Place legend If on, a legend for the triangle colors can be
placed in the CAD file. This is only active if a
color scheme is defined.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Shaded Surface > 139

Display Shaded Surface

Not Lite

Display Shaded Surface tool draws the surface model colored by elevation and by triangle slope
at the same time. The display method utilizes the Hue-Saturation-Value (HSV) color model in
order to visualize the surface. The elevation value is represented by the color hue while the
triangle slope is determined by the color value. The sun angle above the horizon further
influences the brightness of colors in a shaded surface display.

The display is drawn temporarily as a raster in CAD file views, it is not written into the CAD file.

To display a shaded surface:

1. Select the Display Shaded Surface tool.
This opens the Display Shaded Surface dialog:

2. Define settings and click OK.

This creates a shaded surface display in the selected views.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Sun azimuth Direction from which the sun illuminates the
model. Zero is north and angles increase
clockwise.
Sun angle Sun angle above the horizon.
Color scheme Color scheme to use:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Shaded Surface > 140

SETTING EFFECT

· Hot to cold - color scheme containing

magenta, red, yellow, green, cyan, and blue
hues.
· Earth tones - color scheme containing grey,
brown, yellow, and green hues with low
saturation.
· Selected colors - use the Define button to
create a customized color scheme. See
Define a customized color scheme for more
information.
Color cycles Number of color cycles. Use zero to create a
gray scale display showing triangle slope only.
Fit to Determines how colors are fit to elevation
values:
· Whole surface - colors of the color scheme
are fit to the elevation range of the whole
surface.
· View content - colors of the color scheme
are fit to the elevation range that is visible
in a CAD file view. This results in a very
detailed display for large-scale views.
Views View(s) in which the shaded surface is
displayed.

Shaded surface GeoTIFF files can be produced automatically in batch mode using the Utility /
Produce lattice models command from the Surfaces window.

Define a customized color scheme

The Color Scheme dialog allows you to create a color scheme for a shaded surface display. The
dialog uses a Hue-Saturation color model. The software creates smooth transitions between
the colors assigned to the color scheme.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Shaded Surface > 141

The vertical bar on the left shows the colors currently assigned to the scheme. The color field
on the right shows color hue of the color cycle from top to bottom and color saturation from left
to right.

To assign a new color:

1. Click in the color field on the right at the location of the color you want to add to the color
scheme.
OR

1. Define Hue and Saturation values by typing a number or moving the slider. The hue value can
range from 0 to 359, the saturation value from 0 to 100.
This selects the color and adjusts the value in the Hue and Saturation fields. The color is
displayed in the Color field.

2. Click Add in order to add the selected color to the color scheme.
The color is added to the lower end of the bar, thus, the first color is assigned to the highest
elevation values.

To create a new color scheme:

1. Select Remove all command from the Color pulldown menu in the Coloring scheme dialog.
This removes all assigned colors from the current color scheme.

2. Assign new colors to the color scheme as described above.

3. (Optional) Save the color scheme as a file on a hard disk using the Save as command from the
File pulldown menu in the Color Scheme dialog.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Shaded Surface > 142

USE MENU ITEM TO

File - Open Open a previously saved color scheme file.
File - Save As Save the color scheme to a file.
Color - Remove last Remove last color from the color scheme.
Color - Remove all Remove all colors from the color scheme.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Slopes > 143

Display Slopes
Display Slopes tool draws a grid of slope arrows. Each slope arrow shows the direction of water
flow at this location. The arrow length indicates the steepness of the surface at this location.
The tool can also create labels along the arrows which show the gradient of the slope.

To display slope arrows:

1. Select the Display Slopes tool.
The Display Slopes dialog opens:

2. Define settings.

3. (Optional) Click on the Options button in order to open the Slope Settings dialog and define
settings for slope arrow symbology.

4. Click OK to the Display slopes dialog.

5. If Enter origin is switched on, enter the origin point of the grid with a data click.
This draws slope arrows for the selected surface model on the given level.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Mode Display mode for slope arrows:
· Write to file - elements are written and
stored in the CAD file.
Grid size Distance between slope arrow locations.
Level Number of the level in the CAD file on which
triangles are drawn.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Slopes > 144

SETTING EFFECT
Color Color of the arrows. Uses the CAD file color
table.
Weight Line weight of the arrows. Uses CAD file line
weights.
Style Line style of the arrows. Uses CAD file line
styles.
Enter origin If on, you can enter the origin point of the grid
with another data point. If the point is inside
the surface area, an elevation text is drawn at
this location.
Options Opens the Slope Settings dialog. See Slope
settings for more information.

Slope settings

The Slope Settings dialog defines the symbology and label display options for slope arrows
created by the Display Slopes tool.

SETTING EFFECT
Place by Placement point (= point of elevation
measurement) of a slope arrow: Arrow start or

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Slopes > 145

SETTING EFFECT
Arrow center.
Arrowheads Number of arrowheads of a slope arrow:
· One - all arrows have one arrowhead.
· One to three - number of arrowheads
depends on the slope.
Length Two fields specifying the maximum and the
minimum length of a slope arrow.
Slope Slope values at which the arrow length is
equal to:
- maximum length
- two thirds of maximum length
- one third of maximum length
- minimum length
Write slope label If on, a text label showing the slope gradient
is placed along a slope arrow.
Level Level number in the CAD file on which the
label is placed.
Font Font type of slope arrow labels. Uses font
types available in the CAD platform.
Size Text size of slope arrow labels. Given in
millimeters on paper.
Accuracy Number of decimals in the slope arrow label.
Color Color of slope arrow labels. Uses the active
color table of the CAD file.
Weight Line weight of slope arrow labels. Uses the
CAD file line weights.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Triangles > 146

Display Triangles
Display Triangles tool draws colored triangles for a surface model. You can create a coloring
scheme where the color changes according to the surface elevation or according to the slope
gradient of the triangles.

To display triangles:
1. Select the Display Triangles tool.
The Display Triangles dialog opens:

2. Define settings and click OK.

This draws triangles for the selected surface model on the given level.

3. If Place legend is switched on, define the location of drawing the legend with another data
point.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Mode Display mode for triangles:
· Write to file - elements are written and
stored in the CAD file. A triangle boundary is
drawn in counter-clockwise direction.
· Preview - elements are recalculated and
redrawn whenever the view is updated.
Color by Attribute used for coloring:
· Elevation - elevation value of the triangle
determines its color.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Display Triangles > 147

SETTING EFFECT

· Slope - slope gradient of the triangle

determines its color.
Level Number of the level in the CAD file on which
triangles are drawn.
Create filled shapes If on, triangles are filled with color.
Planarize If on, triangles are drawn as planarized
triangles at the given Elevation.
Smooth facets for rendering If on, triangles are displayed with a smoother
change in coloring if CAD rendering is applied
(No effect in MicroStation CE).
Inside fence only If on, triangles are drawn if their center point
is located inside a selected polygon or fence.
Colors Opens the Color scheme dialog. See Creating a
color scheme of discrete colors for more
information.
Color list left of the color scheme preview Opens the CAD file color table for single color
selection.
Place legend If on, a legend for the triangle colors can be
placed in the CAD file. This is only active if a
color scheme is defined.

Triangles can be produced automatically in batch mode using the See Utility / Produce
triangles command from the Surfaces window.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Erase Display > 148

Erase Display
Erase Display tool removes previously displayed contours, triangles, a grid, elevation texts,
slope arrows, raster triangles, or shaded surfaces.

The tools opens a window which shows the status of the display methods for the selected
surface. In the example below, for the surface named ground, elevation texts are drawn in
Written to file mode and a shaded surface is displayed as well. Contours, triangles, a grid, slope
arrows or raster triangles are not displayed.

To erase display methods:

1. Select the Erase Display tool.
This opens the Erase Display dialog:

2. Select the Surface for which to remove a display method.

3. Use the Erase button next to a display method to erase the corresponding display.

4. Click OK in order to close the Erase display dialog.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Label Peaks and Pits > 149

Label Peaks and Pits

Label Peaks and Pits tool draws labels for the highest point on hill tops and the lowest points
inside depressions into the CAD file. The label contains a text showing the elevation value and
a point marker placed at the location of the elevation point.

The layout of the label is determined by the settings in Elevation labels category of the
TerraModeler Settings.

From the dialog of the tool, a peaks and pits settings file can saved for being used in automatic
contour production. See Utility / Produce contours for more information. The settings file
stores all information given in the dialog except the surface model name.

To draw peaks and pits into the CAD file:

1. Select the Label Peaks and Pits tool.
This opens the Label Peaks and Pits dialog:

2. Define settings for peaks and pits display.

OR

2. Load a previously saved settings file into the dialog using the Load settings command from
the File pulldown menu.

3. (Optional) Save the settings into a file on a hard disk by using the Save settings As command
from the File pulldown menu.
Click Cancel to the Label Peaks and Pits dialog if you just want to save a peaks and pits
settings file for automatic contour line production.

4. Click OK to the Label Peaks and Pits dialog.

The software searches for peaks and pits in the surface model and writes the labels into the
CAD file.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Label Peaks and Pits > 150

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Peak level Level, color, and line weight of labels for
peaks. Uses the active CAD file color table
and line weights.
Pit level Level, color, and line weight of labels for pits.
Uses the active CAD file color table and line
weights.
Contour interval Distance between two consecutive contour
lines.
Peak area A peak label is placed if the area enclosed by
the biggest closed contour line around a hill
top is at least as big as the given value.
Pit area A pit label is placed if the area enclosed by
the biggest closed contour line around a
depression is at least as big as the given
value.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Display Surface toolbox > Update Displays > 151

Update Displays
Update Displays tool updates contours, triangles, a grid, elevation texts, slope arrows, and
shaded surfaces after surface models were modified. This tool updates all display methods for
all modified surfaces immediately after clicking on the tool icon.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Domains toolbox > > 152

Domains toolbox
Not Lite, Not UAV

The tools in the Domain toolbox are used to define domains, to assign domain information for
triangles, and to display domains.

Domains are related to the triangles in TerraModeler surface models. The domain number is
stored for each triangle in the surface model TIN file.

You can use domains to separate different types of surface regions from each other. By defining
a list of domains, you can create your own classification system for surface regions. This
classification system may be used for visualization purposes. It allows to distinguish different-
looking surfaces regions from each other.

Typically, you create a list of domains for various regions of the ground surface. The list could
include domains such as ground, grass, rock, forest, or road. For each domain a unique coloring
scheme and level should be assigned.

Display Domain Triangles tool draws surface model triangles using coloring schemes and levels
that are assigned for each domain. If each domain is drawn on a unique CAD file level, it is
easier to do further manipulation with CAD tools, such as:

· Apply area pattern on all triangles belonging to a certain domain using the MicroStation
Pattern Area tool.
· Assign MicroStation rendering materials to triangles belonging to a certain domain.
· Drape an aerial photograph on a surface model using material assignment in MicroStation.

There are also a few tools in TerraModeler which enable the application of processes to certain
domains only. Examples are Display Contours, Display Themes, Draw Profile, Compute Area.

TO USE TOOL

Define domains Define Domains Not Lite, Not UAV

Assign a view for dynamic domain display Domain View Not Lite, Not UAV

Set domain of triangles inside an area Set Area Domain Not Lite, Not UAV

Set domain of triangles between two linear Set Domain Between Lines Not Lite, Not
elements UAV

Set domain of triangles Set Triangle Domain Not Lite, Not UAV

Display triangles using domain coloring Display Domain Triangles Not Lite, Not UAV

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Domains toolbox > Define Domains > 153

Define Domains
Not Lite, Not UAV

Define Domains tool opens a dialog for defining domains. The dialog contains buttons for
adding new domains, editing a domain, and deleting a domain.

The domain definitions can be saved into a text file or loaded from a previously saved file by
using the commands from the File pulldown menu. When you open a CAD file, the software
automatically loads the domain definition file that was used last with this CAD file.

For each domain, a single color or a color scheme can be chosen for visualization. If a color
scheme is defined, the elevation differences of a surface model within the domain area are
represented. Areas for which no specific domain is assigned are displayed using the Default
domain settings.

To add or edit a domain:

1. Click Add in the Define Domains dialog.
OR

1. Select a domain definition and click Edit in the Define Domains dialog.
This opens the Domain dialog:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Domains toolbox > Define Domains > 154

2. Define settings for the domain.

3. Click OK.
The new domain definition is added to the list in the Define Domains dialog or the selected
domain is modified.
A selected domain can be removed from the list by using the Delete button in the dialog.

SETTING EFFECT
Number Number of the new domain. The domain
number is stored for each triangle in the
surface model TIN file if a domain is assigned
to it.
Abbreviation A free text that can be used as abbreviation
for the new domain.
Name A free text used as name for the domain.
Elevations Name of the surface model that is used for
determining the elevation ranges for the
color scheme.
Level Level number for displaying triangles in the
CAD file.
Draw contours If on, contour lines are drawn for this
domain. This effects the display of contour
lines with Display Contours tool.
Colors Opens the Color scheme dialog which is used
to define a coloring scheme. See Creating a
color scheme of discrete colors for more
information.
Color button Opens the active CAD file color table for
single color selection.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Domains toolbox > Display Domain Triangles > 155

Display Domain Triangles

Not Lite, Not UAV

Display Domain Triangles tool draws triangles for a surface model using domain color schemes
and levels.

If there are areas of the surface model where no specific domain is assigned, the display
options of the default domain are used.

To display domain triangles:

1. Select the Display Domain Triangles tool.
The Display Domain Triangles dialog opens:

2. Define settings and click OK.

The display is created.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Mode Display method for drawing domains:
· Preview - displays triangles in preview
mode.
· Write to file - draws triangles permanently
into the CAD file.
Smooth facets for rendering If on, triangles are displayed with a smoother
change in coloring if CAD rendering is applied
(No effect in MicroStation CE or Spatix).

This tool is very similar to the Display Triangles tool. In fact, display domain triangles is an
alternate way of displaying surface model triangles. You can update domain triangles with
the Update Displays tool or erase them with the Erase Display tool.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Domains toolbox > Domain View > 156

Domain View
Not Lite, Not UAV

Domain View lets you select a view which displays domain assignments of the surface model
you are working on. Whenever a CAD tool redraws the contents of this view, TerraModeler
draws the surface model triangles as temporary elements using domain colors.

It is recommended to select a domain view when you are assigning domains to triangles. It
provides the best way of seeing the effects of your work.

To assign a domain view:

1. Select the Domain View tool.
The Domain View dialog opens:

2. Select the View in which you want to see domain assignments.

SETTING EFFECT
Draw only active domain If on, it speeds up the view update by
drawing only the active domain.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Domains toolbox > Set Area Domain > 157

Set Area Domain

Not Lite, Not UAV

Set Area Domain tool defines a domain for all triangles inside or outside a fence. The tool uses
the center point of a triangle to decide if a triangle is inside or outside the fence.

The area can be defined by a fence or selected shape element(s).

To set domain of fence contents:

1. Place a fence or select shape element(s) that define the area.

2. Select the Set Area Domain tool.

This opens the Set Area Domain dialog:

3. Define settings.

4. Accept the fence contents with a data click.

The selected domain is assigned to the triangles inside or outside the fence.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Set to Domain that is assigned to the triangles.
Fence Fence mode: Inside or Outside.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Domains toolbox > Set Domain Between Lines > 158

Set Domain Between Lines

Not Lite, Not UAV

Set Domain Between Lines tool assigns a domain to all triangles between two linear elements.
This tool is designed to be used with linear elements that are close to parallel to each other.
TerraModeler uses the center point of a triangle to decide if the triangle is between the two
linear elements.

To set domain between two linear elements:

1. Select the Set Domain Between Lines tool.
This opens the Set Domain Between Lines dialog:

2. Define settings.

3. Identify the first linear element with a data click.

4. Identify the second linear element with a data click.

5. Accept the two highlighted linear elements with another data click.
The selected domain is assigned to the triangles between the two linear elements.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Set to Domain that is assigned to the triangles.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Domains toolbox > Set Triangle Domain > 159

Set Triangle Domain

Not Lite, Not UAV

Set Triangle Domain tool assigns a domain to individual triangles. The tool can assign a domain
to single triangles or to multiple triangles using a paint method.

To set triangle domains one triangle at a time:

1. Select the Set Triangle Domain tool.

2. This opens the Set Triangle Domain dialog:

3. Define settings.

4. Move the mouse pointer in a CAD file view.

The shape of the triangle at the mouse pointer location is dynamically highlighted.

5. To set the domain of a single triangle, place a data click.

6. If the Method is set to Paint, move the mouse pointer.

The domain is assigned to all triangles the mouse pointer passes over. The end the domain
assignment, place another data click.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Set to Domain that is assigned to the triangles.
Method Defines how triangles are selected for domain
assignment:
· One at a time - each triangle is defined by a
data click in order to assign the domain.
· Paint - all triangles the mouse pointer
passes over between two data clicks are
assigned to the domain.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Draw using Surface toolbox > > 160

Draw using Surface toolbox

The tools in the Draw using Surface toolbox are used to view surface elevations or slopes, and
to draw 3D elements based on a surface model.

TO USE TOOL

View surface elevation / place elements on View Elevation

surface

Compare elevations of two surfaces Compare Elevations

View slope of triangles View Slope

Drop elements to follow surface Drop Element On Surface

Calculate and draw slope from an element Calculate Slope

Fill area with cells Fill Area With Cells

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Draw using Surface toolbox > Calculate Slope > 161

Calculate Slope
Calculate Slope tool calculates a slope from a graphical element onto a surface model. The
starting element is either the top or the bottom edge of a slope. The tool calculates the other
edge of the slope and draws it as a new line string element. The new element follows the
elevation of a selected surface model.

The starting element has to be linear. Valid CAD element types include lines, line strings,
curves, arcs, ellipses, shapes, complex chains and complex shapes.

To calculate slope from an element:

1. Select the Calculate Slope tool.
This opens the Slope dialog:

2. Enter a slope angle in the Angle field and a minimum distance value in the Min dist field.

3. Select a surface to be used for slope calculation.

4. Identify the element to start from.

5. Define the slope direction with a data point. The direction is either left or right from the
starting element.
If found, the other edge of the slope is drawn. You can continue to step 2, 3 or 4.

SETTING EFFECT
Angle Slope angle in degree. A positive value
calculates a slope upwards from the starting
element. A negative value calculates a slope
downwards. You can enter the angle as ratio
of vertical and horizontal distances, for
example, 1:3.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Draw using Surface toolbox > Calculate Slope > 162

SETTING EFFECT
Min dist Minimum distance of vertices in the new line
string. A mathematical slope may have some
vertices very close to each other. For practical
reasons, it is recommended to remove some
of these vertices.
Onto surface Name of the surface used to compute the
other edge of the slope.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Draw using Surface toolbox > Compare Elevations > 163

Compare Elevations
Compare Elevations tool compares elevations of two surfaces at the mouse pointer location. It
opens a dialog which shows the elevations of two surfaces and their difference.

The tool requires at least two surfaces loaded in TerraModeler.

To compare surface elevations:

1. Select the Compare Elevations tool.
The Compare Surfaces dialog opens:

2. Select the surfaces for comparison.

If you move the mouse pointer into a top view, the surface elevations at the mouse pointer
position are displayed. The dialog also shows the difference between the two selected
surfaces.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Draw using Surface toolbox > Drop Element On Surface > 164

Drop Element On Surface

Drop Element On Surface tool drops elements to follow a surface model. The XY shape of an
element remains unchanged but its Z shape is forced to follow the elevation of a surface
model.

The tool works for all linear elements and cells. A linear element is converted into a line string
or a complex chain of line strings. The elevation of the line string vertices is calculated from the
surface model. A cell element remains as a cell. It is dropped on the surface by calculating the
elevation of its origin point.

To drop element(s) on a surface:

1. Select the Drop Element On Surface tool.
This opens the Drop Element On Surface dialog:

2. Define settings in the dialog.

3. Identify the element to drop.

3. Accept the element.

The element is dropped on the surface. You can continue to step 2 or 3.
OR

1. Select element(s) to drop.

2. Select the Drop Element On Surface tool.

3. Define settings in the dialog.

4. Accept element(s).
All selected elements are dropped on the surface.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Draw using Surface toolbox > Drop Element On Surface > 165

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the surface to which elements are
dropped.
Drop to Defines how elevations for the element are
calculated:
· Follow surface - each vertex gets the
elevation value of the surface at its location.
· Highest elevation - all vertices get the
elevation value of the highest vertex.
· Lowest elevation - all vertices get the
elevation value of the lowest vertex.
Dz Elevation offset added to the dropped
element. A positive value drops the element
above the surface model elevation. A
negative value drops the element below the
surface model elevation.
Drop only original vertices If on, only the existing vertices of the element
are dropped on the surface. If off, the
software adds intermediate vertices to the
element to make it follow the surface
elevation more accurately. This is only active
if Drop to is set to Follow surface.
Original z is dz If on, the original elevation values of vertices
are applied as elevation offset to the dropped
element. This is only active if Drop only
original vertices is switched on.
Make copy If on, the original element is not effected.
Instead, a copy of the element is created.
Set level If on, a dropped element is placed on the
given level.
Use fence If on, a MicroStation fence is used to
(MicroStation only) determine what elements are effected.
MicroStation fence modes are used:
· Inside - only elements that are fully inside a
fence are dropped.
· Overlap - elements that overlap with a
fence are dropped.
· Clip - the part of an element that is
overlapped by a fence is dropped, other
parts are not effected.
· Void - only elements that are fully outside a
fence are dropped.
· Void overlap - elements that do not overlap
with a fence are dropped.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Draw using Surface toolbox > Drop Element On Surface > 166

SETTING EFFECT

· Void clip - the part of an element that is not

overlapped by a fence is dropped,
overlapped parts are not effected.
Outside surface Defines the way an element is drawn outside
the surface model area. The methods are:
· Outside part remains unchanged in
elevation but is drawn with active color, line
style and line width.
· Outside part gets interpolated elevation
values and is drawn with active color, line
style and line weight.
· Outside part is not drawn and thus, results
in a gap.

If there are parts of a linear element outside the surface model, the element is split into
separate dropped elements. Thus, a line string or a shape is split into single line strings.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Draw using Surface toolbox > Fill Area With Cells > 167

Fill Area With Cells

Not Spatix

Fill Area With Cells tool fills a bounded area with randomly placed cells. This tool can be used,
for example, to generate a random fill pattern for natural areas such as forests.

The area has to be bounded either by placing a fence or by selecting a shape element.

The tool can be used with two- or three-dimensional cells. You can use surface models to
define the bottom elevation or the top elevation of the cells. Typically, a model of the ground
is used for the cell bottom elevation.

You can define some random variation for the cell dimensions to better resemble naturally
grown plants. Variation in cell height, width, and rotation angle may result in a more realistic
image.

To fill an area with cells:

1. Define the area by placing a fence or by selecting a shape element.

2. Select the Fill Area With Cells tool.

The Fill Area With Cells dialog opens:

3. Define settings in the dialog.

4. Click OK.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Draw using Surface toolbox > Fill Area With Cells > 168

5. Accept the area with another data click.

The application fills the area with cells. The process stops when the area is filled.

SETTING EFFECT
Cell type Type of the cell for area fill:
· Normal cell - cells from a MicroStation cell
library are used.
· RPC cell - RPC cells are used.

Cell name Name of a two- or three-dimensional cell. This

is only active if Cell type is set to Normal cell.
RPC file Location where RPC files are stored on a hard
disk. RPC files are used to replace RPC cells in
rendered views. This is only active if Cell type
is set to RPC cell.
Level Level on which cells are placed.
Area borders Defines how cells are placed close to the area
boundaries:
· Cells completely within borders - cells have
to be completely within the area
boundaries.
· Cells may overlap borders - cells may
partially overlap area boundaries.
Bottom as Name of a surface model for the bottom
elevation of cells. If set to Fixed elevation, all
cells are placed at the given Elevation.
Top as Name of a surface model for the top elevation
of cells. If set to Fixed height, all cells are
drawn with the given Height.
Radius as Defines the width of cells:
· Constant - use the given Radius for all cells.
· Ratio from height - calculates the width as a
direct ratio from the cell height defined in
the cell library.
Minimum distance Defines how close to each other cells are
placed. If less than 100 %, some cells may
partially overlap each other. For forests,
recommended values are between 60 and 120
%.
Height Random variation for the cell height.
Width Random variation for the cell width.
Rotate cells If on, cells are rotated randomly.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Draw using Surface toolbox > Fill Area With Cells > 169

RPC cells are not part of Terra applications. They are purchased by Archvision
(www.archvision.com) and used in rendered views. These cells include texture maps of an
object from different directions and angles. They can be used to render objects like trees,
cars, road furniture etc. in a realistic and correct way no matter from which direction the
object is viewed.

At the moment, cells and thus, the Fill Area With Cells tool does only work in MicroStation.
There is not yet any corresponding element type in Spatix.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Draw using Surface toolbox > View Elevation > 170

View Elevation
View Elevation tool shows the elevation of a surface model at the mouse pointer location. It
also supports the placement of 3D vector elements by deriving surface elevations for the
elements.

To view surface elevation:

1. Select the View Elevation tool.
The View Elevation dialog opens:

If you move the mouse pointer inside a view, the Surface elevation at the mouse pointer
location is displayed in the dialog.

To place elements on surface elevation:

1. Select the View Elevation tool.
The View Elevation dialog opens.

2. Select a Surface from which to derive the elevation values.

3. Switch on Points on surface lock.

If you want to place elements above or below the surface, enter a Dz value. A positive value
places the elements above the surface and a negative value below the surface.

4. Start the digitization of a vector element.

When Points on surface lock is on, TerraModeler calculates the elevation from the given
surface for all data points entered in a CAD file top view. The data point is effected if the XY
location falls inside the surface model area.
The view used for entering data points can be a top view which has been rotated around the
Z-axis.

Make sure to turn off the Points on surface lock if you do not need it any longer. As it effects
all data points, it may interfere with your normal work. The lock is turned off when the View
Elevation dialog is closed.

The Points on surface lock can be switched on/off by using key-in commands/Spaccels:

· Points On Surface on=0 - switches off the Points on surface lock.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Draw using Surface toolbox > View Elevation > 171

· Points On Surface on=1/dz=0.0 - switches on the Points on surface lock and sets the Dz
value to 0.0.

· Points On Surface on=1/dz=2.0 - switches on the Points on surface lock and sets the Dz
value to 2.0.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Draw using Surface toolbox > View Slope > 172

View Slope
View Slope tool shows the slope gradient and the slope direction of a surface model triangle at
the mouse pointer location.

To view slope directions and gradients:

1. Select the View Slope tool.
This opens the View Slope dialog:

2. Select a Surface model and Accuracy setting.

3. Move the mouse pointer inside the surface area.

If the mouse pointer is inside a surface model, the triangle at the mouse pointer position is
highlighted, its slope direction is displayed as an arrow, and its gradient is displayed as
numerical percentage value in the status bar of the CAD platform.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the surface for slope gradient and
direction display.
Accuracy Number of decimals for the slope gradient
display.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > > 173

Drawing Utilities toolbox

The tools in the Drawing Utilities toolbox are used to measure, label and manipulate linear
elements. The tools do not necessarily rely on surface models.

TO USE TOOL

Measure slope of an element Measure Slope

Label elevation of a point Label Elevation

Label surface area inside element Label Area

Place line at a fixed slope Place Sloped Line

Modify linear element elevations to Force Downstream Flow

ensure downstream flow

Set linear element to given elevation Set Linear Elevation

Remove unnecessary vertices from linear Thin Linear Element

element

Add intermediate vertices to linear Densify Linear Element

element

Apply smoothing to linear element Smoothen Linear Element

Connect linear elements that have small Connect Linear Elements

gaps in between

Create a parametrized copy of linear Copy Linear Element

element

Apply alignment offset and station locks Alignment Offset

Check linear elements for geometrical Validate Linear Elements

flaws

Fix vertices almost touching another Fix Touching Elements

element

Import and draw piles into the CAD file Read Piles From File

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Alignment Offset > 174

Alignment Offset
Alignment Offset tool provides an easy way to place elements at a specific station or at a
specific 3D offset from an alignment element. The tool can use any linear element as the
alignment.

Alignment Offset tool opens a dialog which dynamically displays station and offset values at
the mouse pointer location. You can lock data points by station, offset, elevation difference, or
gradient from the selected alignment.

General procedure for applying alignment locks:

1. Select the Alignment Offset tool.

2. Identify the alignment element.

3. Accept the element.

This opens the Alignment Offset dialog:

4. Switch on the locks which you want to apply.

5. Select any CAD element placement tool you want to use.

When you enter a data point, its coordinates are adjusted according to the alignment offset
locks and related to the selected alignment element.

SETTING EFFECT
Start station Station value for the start point of the
alignment. Default is zero.
Station If on, the XY location of a data point is
adjusted to the given station position.
Offset If on, the XY location of a data point is
adjusted to the given offset from the
alignment. The data point determines
whether the offset is computed to the left or
to the right of the alignment.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Alignment Offset > 175

SETTING EFFECT
Dz If on, the Z value of a data point is adjusted
by adding this elevation difference to the
elevation of the alignment element.
Gradient If on, the Z value of a data point is adjusted
by using this gradient percentage from the
elevation of the alignment element.

Make sure to turn off Alignment Offset locks if you do not need it any longer. As it effects all
data points, it may interfere with your normal work. The lock is turned off when the
Alignment Offset dialog is closed.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Connect Linear Elements > 176

Connect Linear Elements

Connect Linear Elements tool creates a continuous line string from two or more single line
(string) elements. The line string creation considers the XY and Z coordinates of the vertices of
the original line elements. The new line string is created on the active CAD file level using the
active symbology settings.

The tool can be used, for example, to create a continuous line from separate line elements that
were extracted automatically, such as paint markings extracted from mobile laser scanner data
in TerraScan.

To connect linear elements:

1. Select line elements.

2. Select the Connect Linear Elements tool.

This opens the Connect Linear Elements dialog:

3. Define settings.

4. Place a data click inside a CAD file view in order to accept the line string creation.
This draws the new line string into the CAD file.

SETTING EFFECT
Max gap Maximum gap between two adjacent line
elements that is closed by the tool.
Measured as true 3D distance between
vertices.
Smoothen Determines the level of smoothing in XY and
Z applied to the new line string. The larger
the value, the more smoothing is applied.

Each data click inside a CAD file view creates a new line string from the selected elements as
long as the tool is active. This may lead easily to duplicated lines created from the same
selection set. You can undo the creation of the new line string by using the Undo command
from the Edit pulldown menu of the CAD platform.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Copy Linear Element > 177

Copy Linear Element

Copy Linear Element tool creates a parametrized copy of a linear element. Furthermore, the
tool can be used to move a linear element in xy and/or z direction without keeping the original
element.

The elevation of the new element may be derived in several ways:

· no change in elevation
· set elevation to a fixed value
· use a given elevation difference from the original element
· use a given elevation difference or a gradient from another linear element

To create a copy of a linear element:

1. Select the Copy Linear Element tool.
This opens the Copy Linear Element dialog:

2. Define settings.

3. Identify the original element which determines the horizontal shape.

4. Identify another element if the vertical shape of the new element is determined from
another element.

5. Select the offset side (left or right) with a data click.

A linear copy of the original element is created or the original element is moved to its new
location.

SETTING EFFECT
Offset If on, the horizontal offset from the original
element to the new element is fixed. If off,

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Copy Linear Element > 178

SETTING EFFECT
the offset is determined by the last data click
of the workflow.
Add vertices to long segments If on, the application adds intermediate
vertices to long line segments. This is useful
to ensure that the created copy follows both
the horizontal shape of the original element
and the vertical shape of another element.
Elevation by Defines the method of elevation value
derivation for the new element:
· Keyin value - constant elevation given as a
numerical value in the Elevation field.
· Elevation point - constant elevation given
by a data click.
· Dz from original - elevation difference from
the original element given in the Dz field.
· Dz from another element - elevation
difference from another element given in
the Dz field.
· Gradient from another element - gradient
percentage from another element given in
the Gradient field.
Projection Defines how the elevation of the new
element is derived from another element:
· Shortest distance - each vertex is compared
against the closest position on the other
element.
· Perpendicular - each vertex is projected
perpendicularly to the other element and
the elevation is derived from the projected
location.
Only active if Elevation by is set to Dz from
another element or Gradient from another
element.
Create copy If on, a copy of the original element is created.
The original element remains unchanged.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Densify Linear Element > 179

Densify Linear Element

Densify Linear Element tool adds intermediate vertices to linear elements. A spacing value
determines the desired distance between consecutive vertices. The tool adds vertices if the
distance between two consecutive vertices in the original element is longer than 1.333 *
Spacing.

To densify linear element(s):

1. Select the Densify Linear Element tool.
The Densify Linear Element dialog opens:

2. Define a Spacing value that determines the distance between consecutive vertices.

3. Identify the element to densify.

4. Accept the element.

Intermediate vertices are added to the selected element.
OR

1. Select linear element(s) to thin.

2. Select the Densify Linear Element tool.

3. Define a Spacing value that determines the distance between consecutive vertices.

4. Accept the element(s) with a data click.

Intermediate vertices are added to all selected element(s).

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Fix Touching Elements > 180

Fix Touching Elements

Fix Touching Elements tool tries to fix selected linear elements in places where elements
intersect or almost touch each other. As a result, the elements are snapped to each other as
shown in the following illustration.

You may run the Validate Linear Elements tool with validation method Touching on in order to
find out if there are such issues in a set of vector elements.

To fix touching elements:

1. Select elements.

2. Select the Fix Touching Elements tool.

This opens the Fix touching elements dialog:

3. Define settings and click OK.

This fixes touching elements according to the given settings and moves them to the active
CAD file level. An information dialog shows the number of effected elements.

SETTING EFFECT
Stroking tolerance Tolerance distance for checking intersecting
elements. Two elements are considered as
touching if the location of a vertex of one
element differs more than the given value
from a vertex or line of the other element.
Touching tolerance Minimum distance between separate
elements. If the distance is smaller,
elements are considered as touching
elements.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Force Downstream Flow > 181

Force Downstream Flow

Force Downstream Flow tool modifies the elevation values of vertices of linear elements to
enforce a consistent slope direction down for the linear element. The tool is useful to ensure
that water stream breaklines run down all the time without small upward changes. The tool
only modifies elevations of vertices if this is required to enforce the consistent downward
direction.

To enforce that linear element(s) go down consistently:

1. Select the Force Downstream Flow tool.

2. Identify the element with a data click.

3. Accept the element selection with another data click.

This modifies the elevation values of the vertices of the selected linear element.
OR

1. Select linear element(s).

2. Select the Force Downstream Flow tool.

3. Accept the selected element(s) with a data click.

This modifies the elevation values of the vertices of all selected elements.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Label Area > 182

Label Area
Label Area tool measures and labels the size of a bounded area. The tool can be used to label
the area of closed elements in the CAD file.

The tool places the area size value and possibly some prefix and/or suffix. The settings for the
tool are defined in Drawing utilities / Label Area category of the TerraModeler Settings. The
symbology of the label is further determined by the active symbology settings in the CAD file.

To create area labels:

1. Select the Label Area tool.
This opens the Label Area dialog:

2. Select the area type for labeling.

3. Identify the bounding element which defines the area.

The label is displayed at the mouse pointer location.

4. Define the location of the label with another data click.

This draws the label in the CAD file. You can continue with step 2 or 3.

SETTING EFFECT
Label 2d area The tool measures and labels the 2d area
defined by the closed element.
Label 3d area The tool measures and labels the 3d area
defined by the closed element that is
projected on the given Surface.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Label Elevation > 183

Label Elevation
Label Elevation tool creates an elevation label for a data point. The tool can be used to label the
elevation of points on vector elements in the CAD file.

The tool places the elevation value of the data point and a guiding line which connects the data
point and the text. The settings for the tool are defined in Drawing utilities / Label Elevation
category of the TerraModeler Settings. The symbology of the label is further determined by the
active symbology settings in the CAD file.

To create elevation labels:

1. Select the Label Elevation tool.

2. Identify the data point, for example, by snapping to a linear element.

The label is displayed at the mouse pointer location.

3. Enter the location of the label with another data click.

This draws the label in the CAD file. You can continue with step 2 or 3.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Measure Slope > 184

Measure Slope
Measure Slope tool measures and labels the average vertical slope of a linear element. The
slope is calculated using the following mathematical expression:
Slope = 100 * (End z - Start z) / Horizontal length of element

Even if the element is a line string, the tool does not use the individual segments of the
element. The slope is always calculated from the element's start point to its end point.

The element to be measured has to be linear. Valid CAD element types include lines, line
strings, curves and arcs.

The tool places the slope gradient as a percentage value and the slope direction as an arrow
close to the linear element and at the mouse click location. The settings for the label
symbology are defined in Drawing utilities / Measure Slope category of the TerraModeler
Settings.

To measure the slope of an element:

1. Select the Measure Slope tool.
This opens the Measure Slope dialog:

2. Select the number of decimals for slope gradient display in the Accuracy list.

3. Identify the element. The data click also defines the location of the label.
The slope percentage and the slope direction are displayed in the status bar of the CAD
platform.

4. Place a data click to accept the labeling or a reset click to reject the labeling. You can continue
to step 2 or 3.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Place Sloped Line > 185

Place Sloped Line

Place Sloped Line tool places a 3D line at a fixed vertical slope. You enter the start point of the
line as a normal data point. The second data point defines the XY position of the end point. The
elevation of the end point is calculated using the given slope or the given end point elevation.

The slope is expressed as a percentage by the following mathematical expression:

Slope = 100 * Vertical distance / Horizontal distance

To place a line at a fixed slope:

1. Select the Place Sloped Line tool.
This opens the Place Sloped Line dialog:

2. Fix the Slope and/or End Z value. If both values are fixed, the length of the line is defined by
the two values. If only one value is fixed, step 4 defines the end point of the line.

3. Place the start point of the line with a data click.

4. Place the end point of the line with a data click.

You can continue with step 2 or 4. The finish the line, click the reset mouse button.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Read Piles From File > 186

Read Piles From File

Read Piles From File tool imports and draws pile locations into the CAD file. "Pile" refers to
piles or pillars that are slammed into the ground for stabilizing ground, e.g. close to
construction sides, roads, etc. When such an object is placed, its location is also surveyed with
either top + bottom Z or top Z + length. TerraModeler can read a text file with the following
attributes for each pile:

· Easting - X coordinate of the pile. Mandatory attribute.

· Northing - Y coordinate of the pile. Mandatory attribute.
· Top Z - top elevation coordinate of the pile. Mandatory attribute.
· Base Z - base elevation coordinate of the pile. Mandatory attribute if length is not provided.
· Length - length of the pile. Mandatory attribute if Base Z is not provided.
· Width - width of the pile.
· Number - number of the pile.

The tool draws a cylindrical cell element in the CAD file if the pile has a circular base shape or a
cell with polygons on each sides if the base shape is rectangular.

The tool aims for checking tasks (are the piles placed correctly) and for monitoring. Later ground
surface surveys may reveal changes of the ground and then, the pile drawings can be used to
check if the ground changes because of problems with the piles.

To read piles from a text file:

1. Select the Read Piles from File tool.
This opens the first Read piles from file dialog, a standard dialog for selecting files.

2. Select the text file that stores the pile attributes and click Open.
This opens the File Format for Import dialog:

The dialog shows the first rows of the text file.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Read Piles From File > 187

3. Check the Delimiter and select the correct one if the automatic selection is incorrect.

4. Select the correct attributes for each column in the text file. Select Ignore, if a column from
the text file must not be imported.

5. Click OK.
This opens another Read Piles From File dialog:

6. Define settings and click OK.

This draws the pile elements into the CAD file. The elements (and labels) are drawn on the
given level(s) using the active symbology of the CAD file.

SETTING EFFECT
Pile type Shape of the pile: Circular or Rectangular.
Pile width Diameter or edge length of a pile. The value
is used if no width value for each pile is
provided in the text file.
Level CAD file level on which the pile elements are
drawn.
Draw number label If on, the number attribute is drawn on the
given Level. This requires a number attribute
for each pile in the text file.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Set Linear Elevation > 188

Set Linear Elevation

Set Linear Elevation tool adjusts a linear element to a given elevation. It sets a constant
elevation for each vertex of the element.

To set the elevation of linear element(s):

1. Select the Set Linear Elevation tool.
The Set Linear Elevation dialog opens:

2. Define an Elevation value.

3. Identify the element to adjust with a data click.

4. Accept the element with another data click.

The element is adjusted to the given elevation. You can continue to step 2 or 3.
OR

1. Select element(s) to adjust.

2. Select the Set Linear Elevation tool.

3. Define an Elevation value.

4. Accept element(s) with a data click.

All selected element(s) are adjusted to the given elevation.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Smoothen Linear Element > 189

Smoothen Linear Element

Smoothen Linear Element tool can be used to smooth linear elements with a high vertex
density. It has been developed to smoothen automatically extracted rail lines created by the
Find rails tool of TerraScan. However, it may be used for any linear element. The smoothing is
done by fitting vertices to an average line or circular arcs within a given distance.

To smooth linear element(s):

1. Select element(s) to smooth.

2. Select the Smoothen Linear Element tool.

The Smoothen Linear Element dialog opens:

3. Define settings.

4. Accept element(s) with a data click.

All selected element(s) are smoothed.

SETTING EFFECT
Method Determines the smoothening method:
· Smoothen current vertices - based on line
fitting equation.
· Add vertices at spacing - based on B-Spline
curvature.
· Add vertices by turn angle - based on B-
Spline curvature.
Modify Element dimension to modify in the smooth
process:
· Xyz - horizontal and vertical variation of
vertices is modified.
· Xy - only horizontal dimension. The vertical
variation of vertices is not modified.
· Z - only vertical dimension. The horizontal
dimension of vertices is not modified.
This is only active if Method is set to
Smoothen current vertices.
Average Forward/Backward distance for the fitting
algorithm. Within this distance the vertices

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Smoothen Linear Element > 190

SETTING EFFECT
are fitted to an average line or circular arc.
This is only active if Method is set to
Smoothen current vertices.
Spacing Distance between consecutive vertices along
the smoothed element. This is only active if
Method is set to Add vertices at spacing.
Max turn Maximum angle between consecutive line
segments along the smoothed element. This
is only active if Method is set to Add vertices
by turn angle.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Thin Linear Element > 191

Thin Linear Element

Thin Linear Element tool removes unnecessary vertices from linear elements. A tolerance value
determines the largest allowed 3D distance between the original and the resulting linear
element.

To thin linear element(s):

1. Select the Thin Linear Element tool.
The Thin Linear Element dialog opens:

2. Define a Tolerance value that determines how much the element is allowed to move.

3. Identify the element to thin with a data click.

4. Accept the element with another data click.

All unnecessary vertices are removed from the selected element.
OR

1. Select linear element(s) to thin.

2. Select the Thin Linear Element tool.

3. Define a Tolerance value that determines how much the element(s) are allowed to move.

4. Accept the element(s) with a data click.

All unnecessary vertices are removed from selected element(s).

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Validate Linear Elements > 192

Validate Linear Elements

Validate Linear Elements tool can be used for checking linear elements for geometrical flaws. It
is intended to be used, for example, for checking vector data from existing maps (such as
building footprints) before it is used for further processing or for validating newly created
vector data before delivery.

The following figure illustrates the geometrical flaws that can be found with the tool.

The tool opens a dialog with a list of all geometry flaws that it found according to the selected
settings. In this dialog, there are user controls for checking the issues in an organized way.

To validate linear elements:

1. Select elements.

2. Select the Validate Linear Elements tool.

This opens the Validate Linear Settings dialog:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Validate Linear Elements > 193

3. Select which geometrical flaws you want to validate.

4. If applicable, define additional settings.

5. Click OK.
This opens the Validate Linear Elements dialog, a dialog that helps you to check the
geometrical flaws in the vector data.

SETTING EFFECT
Stroking Tolerance distance for checking the
geometry. A geometrical flaw is detected if
the location of a vertex differs more than the
given value from other vertices or lines.
Touching Minimum distance between separate
elements. If the distance is smaller,
elements are detected as touching elements.
Angle Determines what is a sharp XY turn in the
geometry. A value of 145 means that the
smallest allowed angle between two lines at
a vertex is 35 degrees. Smaller angles are
considered a sharp turn. Values can range
from 0 to 180.
z-Angle Determines what is a sharp Z turn in the
geometry. Defined in the same way as Angle.
Values can range from 0 to 180 degree.
Exclude crossings If on, the Touching validity check ignores
places where one line string element crosses
another line string element at least two
times.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Validate Linear Elements > 194

Validate linear elements dialog

The Validate Linear Elements dialog shows a list of geometrical flaws that the tool found in the
selected elements. Further, it provides user controls for checking the problems in an organized
way. CAD tools can be used to fix the geometry problems.

Index - unique ID number of a vector element. One element can have several geometry flaws.

Element type - CAD element type. Valid element types include shapes, complex shapes,
ellipses, lines, line strings.

Problem type - geometry flaw.

Status - status of the element. Can be Active, Approved, or Dropped.

Vertices - number of vertices of the element.

Min. elevation - minimum elevation of an element. This column can be changed to show the
maximum elevation or the elevation range of vertices of an element.

Show - highlights the selected problem location or element. Select a row in the list and click on
the button. Move the mouse pointer inside a CAD file view. This highlights a problem location
by drawing small squares around vertices. Place a data click inside a view in order to center the
problem location/element in the view.

Identify - selects a problem location or element in the list. Click on the button and place a data
click close to an element in a CAD file view. The problem location or element closest to the data
click is selected in the list.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Drawing Utilities toolbox > Validate Linear Elements > 195

Approve - sets the status of a problem element to Approved. This should be used after a
geometrical flaw has been fixed.

Reactivate - sets the status of a problem element to Active. The button is only available if an
element with status Approved is selected in the list.

Drop - drops a complex element into its single elements. Dropping a complex element is
necessary to fix a gap (break). The button is only available if an element with problem type
Break and status Active is selected. The status of the dropped element is changed to Dropped.

Select - selects the geometry of the element that is selected in the list. Select a row in the list
and click on the button. This selects the element. You may use the Show button in order to
move the view to the location of the element.

Processing settings command in the Settings pulldown menu lets you view and change the
settings for validating elements. The command opens the Validate linear elements processing
dialog described above. After changing settings, the list of elements in the Validate linear
elements dialog is updated automatically.

View settings command in the Settings pulldown menu define the content and order of
elements in the Validate linear elements dialog.

SETTING EFFECT
Show Determines what elements are displayed in
the list: All elements or Problem elements.
Primary sort The elements are sorted primarily according
to the given attribute.
Secondary sort The elements are sorted secondarily
according to the given attribute.
For elevation show Determines what vertex elevation value is
shown in the last column of the list:
Minimum elevation, Maximum elevation or
Elevation change.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Area toolbox > > 196

Edit Area toolbox

The tools in the Edit Area toolbox are used to modify surface model points or triangles inside or
outside an area. The area is defined by a fence or a shape element. Valid element types include
shapes, complex shapes and ellipses.

TO USE TOOL

Flatten points to a fixed elevation Flatten Area

Raise / lower points by a vertical distance Move Area

Drop / lift points to follow another surface Drop Area

Exclude triangles Exclude Area

Insert elements as internal hole boundaries Insert Hole Element

Remove points from the model Remove Area

These tools considers the area boundary usually as a two-dimensional boundary. The Z
coordinates of both, boundary vertices and surface model points are ignored when deciding
what points are inside or outside the area.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Area toolbox > Drop Area > 197

Drop Area
Drop Area tool modifies the elevations of surface model points by dropping them to other
selected surfaces. The direction of movement is either up or down:

· Down - a point in the active surface is modified if one of the selected surfaces is located
below that point's elevation. The elevation of the point is set to the highest elevation of the
surfaces below the point.
· Up - a point in the active surface is modified if one of the selected surfaces is located above
that point's elevation. The elevation of the point is set to the lowest elevation of the
surfaces above the point.
The tool drops points inside or outside a fence. The fence can be defined by a fence or selected
shape element. Valid element types include shapes, complex shapes and ellipses.

To drop area points:

1. Place a fence or a shape element to define the area. (Optional) Select the shape.

2. Select the Drop Area tool.

The Area drop dialog opens:

3. Select the active Surface from which to drop points and a Fence mode.

4. Identify the bounding shape for the area, if a shape element is used and not selected
already.

5. Accept the fence contents with a data click.

The Drop Surface Points onto Surfaces dialog opens:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Area toolbox > Drop Area > 198

1. Select a Direction and surface(s) to which points are dropped.

2. Click OK.
The points are dropped to the surface(s).

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Area toolbox > Exclude Area > 199

Exclude Area
Exclude Area tool excludes or includes surface model triangles. The tool changes the status of
all the triangles inside or outside a fence. The application uses the center point of a triangle to
determine whether a triangle is inside or outside the fence.

The fence can be defined by a fence or one or multiple shape element(s). Valid element types
include shapes, complex shapes and ellipses.

To include/exclude triangles inside an area:

1. Place a fence or a shape element(s) to define the area. (Optional) Select the shape(s).

2. Select the Exclude Area tool.

The Area exclude dialog opens:

3. Select settings for modifying the status of triangles.

4. Identify the bounding shape for the area, if a shape element is used and not selected
already.

5. Accept the fence contents with a data click.

The status of the triangles is modified.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Fence Defines where triangles are effected:
· Inside - status of triangles inside the fence
is changed.
· Outside - status of triangles outside the
fence is changed.
Operation Status to which the triangles are changed:
Exclude or Include.
Included Highlight color for included triangles. Uses the
active color table of the CAD file.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Area toolbox > Exclude Area > 200

SETTING EFFECT
Excluded Highlight color for excluded triangles. Uses
the active color table of the CAD file.

The tool effects triangles in the same way as the Exclude Triangle tool. Thus, you may include
triangles with the Exclude Area tool that were previously excluded with the Exclude Triangle
tool or vice versa.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Area toolbox > Flatten Area > 201

Flatten Area
Flatten Area tool flattens surface model points to a fixed elevation. The tool sets the elevation
of all points inside or outside a fence.

You can enter the new elevation as a key-in value or as a data point.

The fence can be defined by a fence or shape element. Valid element types include shapes,
complex shapes and ellipses.

To flatten area points to a fixed elevation:

1. Place a fence or a shape element to define the area. (Optional) Select the shape.

2. Select the Flatten Area tool.

The Area flatten dialog opens:

3. Define settings.

4. Identify the bounding shape for the area, if a shape element is used and not selected
already.

5. Accept the fence contents with a data click. The data point determines the new elevation
value for the surface points if Z is switched off.
The points are moved to the given elevation.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Fence Defines where points are effected:
· Inside - points inside the fence are modified
in elevation.
· Outside - points outside the fence are
modified in elevation.
Z Elevation value to which points are moved. If
on, the points are fixed to the given elevation
value. If off, points are fixed to an elevation
value given by the data point in step 5.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Area toolbox > Flatten Area > 202

Flatten Area tool can be used for creating a flat plane inside a model. However, this operation
alone does not produce a flat area with an exact boundary because the tool does not clip the
triangles overlapping the fence border. The tool effects only the points inside the area. After
the operation the surface model may start sloping down or up within the area boundary.

In order to create an exactly bounded flat area, you have to add the boundary lines to the
surface model and make sure that triangles do not overlap the boundary.

General procedure for creating a flat plane:

1. Place a shape element to define the area.

2. Set the elevation of the shape element using the Set Linear Elevation tool.

3. Add the shape element as Hard breakline points to the surface model using the Insert
Breakline Element tool.

4. Select the shape element.

5. Start the Flatten Area tool to fix all the points inside the bounding element to the desired
elevation.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Area toolbox > Insert Hole Element > 203

Insert Hole Element

Insert Hole Element tool creates a void area inside the surface model by excluding all triangles
inside a closed element. The bounding element can serve as a 2d boundary or as a 3d boundary:

· 2d boundary - the elevation of the element has no effect. The two dimensional shape of the
element is combined with the existing elevation of the surface model to create a boundary.
· 3d boundary - the three dimensional vertices of the element are combined with the surface
model to create a boundary.
The boundary element has to be a closed linear element. Valid element types include shapes,
complex shapes and ellipses.

The tool modifies the triangle network of the surface by adding addition vertices along the
boundary element.

To insert element(s) to a surface as hole boundaries:

1. Select the Insert Hole Element tool.
The Insert Hole Element dialog opens:

2. Define settings for the hole area.

3. Identify the boundary element to insert with a data click.

4. Accept the element with another data click.

TerraModeler inserts the element to the surface and creates a void area inside. You can
continue to step 2 or 3.
OR

1. Select element(s) to insert as holes.

2. Select the Insert Hole Element tool.

3. Accept the element(s) with a data click.

TerraModeler inserts the element(s) to the surface and creates void area(s) inside.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Area toolbox > Insert Hole Element > 204

SETTING EFFECT
Insert as Set the boundary type:
· 2d boundary - use only the two dimensional
shape of the element.
· 3d boundary - insert vertices using the
elevation of the element.
Generate points along breakline If on, additional intermediate vertices are
added to the boundary element at the given
Every distance. This is only active if Insert as is
set to 3d boundary.

The tool changes the status of the triangles inside the void area to excluded. You may include
triangles with the Exclude Area tool or the Exclude Triangle tool in order to remove the void
area.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Area toolbox > Move Area > 205

Move Area
Move Area tool moves surface model points up or down by a given distance. The tool modifies
the elevation of all points inside or outside a fence.

You can enter the distance as a key-in value or with a data point.

The fence can be defined by a fence or shape element. Valid element types include shapes,
complex shapes and ellipses.

To move area points:

1. Place a fence or a shape element to define the area. (Optional) Select the shape.

2. Select the Move Area tool.

The Area move up/down dialog opens:

3. Define settings.

4. Identify the bounding shape for the area, if a shape element is used and not selected
already.

5. Accept the fence contents with a data click. The data point determines the distance for
moving the points if Dz is switched off.
The points are moved up or down.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Fence Defines where points are effected:
· Inside - points inside the fence are modified
in elevation.
· Outside - points outside the fence are
modified in elevation.
Dz Vertical distance by which the points are
moved. A positive value moves points
upwards, a negative value downwards.
If on, the points are moved by the given
elevation difference value. If off, points are

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Area toolbox > Move Area > 206

SETTING EFFECT
moved by the distance defined with the last
data click.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Area toolbox > Remove Area > 207

Remove Area
Remove Area tool deletes points from a surface model. This tool removes all points inside or
outside a fence.

The fence can be defined by a fence or shape element. Valid element types include shapes,
complex shapes and ellipses.

To remove area points:

1. Place a fence or a shape element to define the area. (Optional) Select the shape.

2. Select the Remove Area tool.

This opens the Area remove dialog:

3. Select a Surface from which to remove points.

4. Select a Fence mode to determine where points are effected.

5. Identify the bounding shape for the area, if a shape element is used and not selected
already.

6. Accept the fence contents.

The points are removed and the triangle network is updated.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Point toolbox > > 208

Edit Point toolbox

The tools in the Edit Point toolbox are used to modify a surface model on point-by-point basis.

TO USE TOOL

Construct/remove a breakline between Construct Breakline

points

Insert point along a breakline Insert Point Along Breakline

Insert a point to the model Insert Point

Move a point in the model Move Point

Remove a point from the model Remove Point

Exclude/include triangles Exclude Triangle

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Point toolbox > Construct Breakline > 209

Construct Breakline
Construct Breakline tool constructs or removes breaklines between existing points in a model.
Breaklines effect the way a model is triangulated. In this context, a breakline is a triangle edge
connecting two points in the surface model. Thus, constructing or removing breaklines does not
effect the actual points in a model, but it changes the way those points are connected by the
triangle network.

The tool prompts you to identify two points in a surface model. A breakline is constructed, if
the two points are not already connected by a breakline of the same type. If the two points are
connected by a breakline of the same type, this tool removes the existing breakline.

To construct or remove breaklines:

1. Select the Construct Breakline tool.
The Construct Breakline dialog opens:

2. Select a view for breakline display with a data click inside the view.
Breaklines inside the selected view are highlighted with colors according to the breakline
type.

3. Define settings in the dialog.

4. Identify a first point in the model.

5. Identify a second point in the model.

A breakline is constructed or removed. You can continue with steps 3 or 4.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the surface for which to add or
remove breaklines.
Construct Type of the new breakline points: Hard
breakline, Soft breakline or Guided
breakline. See also Breakline types.
Draw hard Preview color for hard breaklines.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Point toolbox > Construct Breakline > 210

SETTING EFFECT
Draw soft Preview color for soft breaklines.
Draw guided Preview color for guided breaklines.

Attempting to construct a breakline may fail because:

· The new breakline would intersect an existing breakline. Breaklines can not
intersect each other. Try to remove the old breakline first.
· The two points are far apart. Try to construct a shorter breakline first.
· The breakline would break through a very large number of triangle edges. Try to
construct a shorter breakline first.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Point toolbox > Exclude Triangle > 211

Exclude Triangle
Exclude Triangle tool excludes or includes triangles in a surface model. An included triangle is
considered to be valid information about a surface. An excluded triangle is invalid, the surface
does not exist at this location or the elevation is unknown. An excluded triangle is neither
drawn in profiles, used in volume calculations, nor displayed in surface representations.

There are several methods of changing the status of a triangle with the tool:

· One at a time - triangles are defined one-by-one with data clicks inside the triangles. Can
toggle between included and excluded status.
· Paint - several triangles are defined by touching them with the mouse pointer between two
data clicks. Can toggle between included and excluded status.
· Boundary line - triangles are defined by the area between a boundary line and a line
determined by a data click. The boundary line can be any linear element. The status can be
changed from included to excluded only.
· Between lines - triangles are defined by two linear elements. The status can be changed
from included to excluded only.

To include or exclude triangles:

1. Select the Exclude Triangle tool.
The Exclude Triangle dialog opens:

2. Select a Surface and colors for highlighting Included and Excluded triangles.

3. Select a Method for changing the status of triangles.

Continue depending on the selected Method.

Method: One at a time

4. Identify the triangle. The effected triangle is highlighted in either Included color or Excluded
color if the mouse point is inside the triangle area.
A data click toggles the status of the triangle.

Method: Paint

4. Identify a view for triangle display.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Point toolbox > Exclude Triangle > 212

5. Enter a data click in the first triangle. The effected triangle is highlighted in either Included
color or Excluded color if the mouse point is inside the triangle area.
This mouse click determines whether triangles are included or excluded. If the first triangle
is currently included, the tool excludes triangles the mouse pointer passes through. If the
first triangle is currently excluded, the tool includes triangles.

6. Move the mouse pointer over all triangles that are to be excluded/included.

7. To finish changing the status of triangles, enter a second data click.

The status is toggled for all triangles that were touched by the mouse pointer.

Method: Boundary line

4. Identify a linear element as boundary line.

5. Identify the direction to which triangles are excluded by moving the mouse pointer away
from the linear element.
A line is displayed at the mouse pointer location which defines the other boundary for
excluding triangles.

6. Accept the area for triangle exclusion with a data click.

The status is toggled to excluded for all triangles that are between the boundary line and the
line defined by the second data click in step 6. A triangle is effected if its center point is
between the boundary lines.

Method: Between lines

4. Identify a linear element as first line.

5. Identify another linear element as second line.

The status is toggled to excluded for all triangles that are between the two selected linear
elements. A triangle is effected if its center point is between the two lines.

To exclude/include triangles within a specific area, see Exclude Area tool for another option.
Long triangles inside a surface model or along outer boundaries of a surface model can be
excluded automatically during surface model creation or using the Edit / Exclude long
triangles command in the Surfaces window.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Point toolbox > Insert Point > 213

Insert Point
Insert Point tool adds a new point to a surface model. You enter the X and Y location as a data
point. The elevation can be a key-in value or the elevation of the data point.

In addition, the tool can add a leveling text for the new point and optional, a point marker. The
settings for the label are defined in Elevation labels category and Insert Point category of the
TerraModeler Settings. The symbology of the label is further determined by the active
symbology settings in the CAD file.

To insert a point to a surface model:

1. Select the Insert Point tool.
This opens the Insert Point dialog:

2. Select a Surface model for which to insert new points.

3. Switch on Z and enter an elevation value in order to use a key-in elevation for new points.
OR
Switch off Z in order to use the data point elevation for new points.

4. Move the mouse pointer inside a view.

The XY coordinates a of the mouse pointer location are dynamically displayed in the dialog.
The elevation of the data point is displayed at the mouse pointer location.

5. Define the location of the new point with a data click.

The point is added to the model and possibly, a leveling text is drawn at the location. You can
continue to step 2, 3, or 4.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Point toolbox > Insert Point Along Breakline > 214

Insert Point Along Breakline

Insert Point Along Breakline tool inserts new points along an existing breakline. This is useful if
the distance between two breakline points is very long compared to the average distance
between surface points. A long breakline produces long narrow triangles in the surface model.
Interpolating new points along the breakline may improve the surface model by making the
triangles more uniform in size and closer to equilateral.

The elevation along the breakline does not change as the elevation of the new point is
interpolated from the two end points of the breakline.

To insert a point along a breakline:

1. Select the Insert Point Along Breakline tool.
This opens the Insert Point Along Breakline dialog:

2. Select a view for breakline display.

Breaklines inside the selected view are highlighted as colored lines according to the
breakline type.

3. Select a Surface model for which to enter breakline points.

4. Place a new point with a data click. The data point is projected to the closest breakline. The
effected breakline is highlighted as blue line if the mouse pointer comes close to it.
A new point is interpolated and inserted to the model. You can continue with steps 3 or 4.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Point toolbox > Move Point > 215

Move Point
Move Point tool moves an existing point in a surface model. The tool can change a point
location in different ways:

· Elevation - only the elevation of the point changes. The XY location remains the same. You
can enter the new elevation as a key-in value or as a data point.
· Xy location - only the XY location changes, the elevation remains the same.
· Xyz location - all of the coordinate values are modified.

The tool opens a dialog which shows dynamically the current coordinate values of the point to
be moved and the new coordinate values close to the mouse pointer location to which the
point is moved.

To move a point in a surface model:

1. Select the Move Point tool.
The Move Point dialog opens:

2. Define settings for moving a point.

3. Identify the point to move. The effected point is highlighted by a circle if the mouse pointer
comes close to it.
The XY and/or Z coordinates of the effected point and the mouse pointer location are
dynamically displayed in the dialog.

4. Define the new location of the point with a data click.

You can continue with steps 2 or 3.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Change Defines what coordinates are changed for the
point:
· Elevation - the Z coordinate of the point is
modified.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Point toolbox > Move Point > 216

SETTING EFFECT

· Xy location - the XY coordinates of the point

are modified.
· Xyz location - the XYZ coordinates of the
point are modified.
Move to If on, the point is moved to the given
elevation value. If off, the point is moved to
an elevation given by the data point. This is
only active if Change is set to Elevation.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Edit Point toolbox > Remove Point > 217

Remove Point
Remove Point tool deletes a point from a surface model. It automatically reorganizes the
triangulation at the modified location.

To remove a point from a model:

1. Select the Remove Point tool.
This opens the Remove Point dialog:

2. Select a Surface model from which to remove points.

3. Identify a point. The effected point is highlighted by a circle if the mouse pointer comes close
to it.
The point is removed from the model. You can continue with steps 2 or 3.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

General toolbox > > 218

General toolbox
The tools in the General toolbox are used to define user settings, to set intended plotting scale,
to manage surfaces, to save surface models, to view and send license information, and to
access the on-line help.

TO USE TOOL

Change user settings Settings

Define coordinate range and resolution Define Coordinate Setup

Set intended plotting scale / rescale Set Scale

elements

Manage surfaces Surfaces

Save all modified surface models Save Surfaces

View information about TerraModeler About TerraModeler

View on-line help Help On TerraModeler

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

General toolbox > About TerraModeler > 219

About TerraModeler

About TerraModeler tool opens a dialog which shows information about TerraModeler and
about the license.

From this dialog, you can open the License information dialog which looks the same for all Terra
Applications:

Use the Request license button to start the online registration for node-locked licenses.

More information about license registration is available on the Terrasolid web pages.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

General toolbox > Define Coordinate Setup > 220

Define Coordinate Setup

Define Coordinate Setup tool sets up coordinate system values that a Terra Application uses for
laser points and images. It determines the coordinate range inside which all data must be
located and the resolution to which coordinate values are rounded. The coordinate setup is
stored into the active CAD file and is used by all Terra Applications.

Terra Applications use signed 32 bit integer values for storing coordinates of laser points and
images. This has the advantage of using only 12 bytes of memory for the coordinate information
of each point. You can control how accurately coordinate values are stored by defining how big
each integer step is.

If, for example, one integer step is equal to one millimeter, all coordinate values are rounded
to the closest millimeter. At the same time it would impose a limitation on how far apart points
can be or how big the coordinate ranges are. Millimeter steps produce a coordinate cube which
has a size of 232 millimeters or 4294967.296 meters. If the origin of the coordinate system is at
[0.0, 0.0, 0.0], the coordinate ranges are limited to values between -2147483 and +2147483. If
necessary, you can fit the coordinate ranges to your data by modifying the Easting and Northing
coordinates of the coordinate system origin.

If one integer step is equal to one centimeter, the coordinate values can range from -21 million
to +21 million which is large enough for most coordinate systems.

To define the coordinate setup:

1. Select the Define Coordinate Setup tool.
This opens the Define Coordinate Setup dialog:

2. Define settings and click OK.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

General toolbox > Define Coordinate Setup > 221

This modifies the coordinate system values used by all Terra Applications in the active CAD
file.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

General toolbox > Help On TerraModeler > 222

Help on TerraModeler

Help on TerraModeler tool opens the online help in the standard web browser.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

General toolbox > Model Settings > 223

Model Settings
Model Settings tool lets you change a number of settings that control how TerraModeler works.
Selecting this tool opens the TerraModeler Settings window.

The settings are grouped into logical categories. Selecting a category in the list displays the
appropriate controls next to the category list.

The different categories and related settings are described in detail in Chapter TerraModeler
Settings.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

General toolbox > Save Surfaces > 224

Save Surfaces
Save Surfaces tool saves all modified surface models to the hard disk. When you work on a
surface model, all the surface data is kept in the computer's RAM. This tool ensures that all
modifications are saved permanently to the surface model file.

You can use Surfaces tool to check what surfaces have been modified. The Status field in the
Surfaces window indicates the storage status of each surface.

In the TerraModeler Settings, there is the Saving surfaces category for controlling when surface
models are saved automatically.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

General toolbox > Set Scale > 225

Set Scale
Set Scale tool sets the intended plotting scale of the design and rescales elements. Plotting
scale affects the size of text elements that TerraModeler creates.

To set the intended plotting scale:

1. Select the Set Scale tool.
The Set Plotting Scale dialog opens:

2. Enter a value for the New scale.

3. Select elements to be rescaled.

4. Click OK.
The selected element types are rescaled.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

General toolbox > Surfaces > 226

Surfaces
Surfaces tool opens a window for managing surface models. You can use it, for example, to
open, close, and delete surfaces, to rename surfaces, view surface statistics, perform
mathematical operations with surfaces, and to import and export surface data.

The Surfaces window shows a list of available and active surfaces. For every existing surface
model the list shows the number of points in the model and the elevation range. You may
choose additional fields to be shown in the window.

See Chapter Managing Surfaces for a complete description of the menu commands.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > > 227

Profiles toolbox
The tools in the Profiles toolbox are used to draw profiles and cross sections. Profiles and cross
sections rely on alignment elements. The tools for updating profiles, projecting elements to
and from profiles, labeling profile elevations, and creating output reports from profiles only
work as long as the alignment element is available in the CAD file.

For reasons of simplicity, the following text refers to profiles and cross sections with the term
“profile” if no differentiation between the two elements is necessary. This corresponds to the
way of naming the tools in the software. The tools Update Profile, Project into Profile, Project
From Profile and Label Profile Elevations can be applied to cross sections as well.

TO USE TOOL

Draw cross section view Draw Section View

Draw profile along an alignment Draw Profile

Draw cross sections along an alignment Draw Alignment Sections

Update profile or cross section Update Profile

Setup views to automatically display Setup Automatic Sections

surface sections

Project 3d elements into a profile Project Into Profile

Project elements from a profile to 3d Project From Profile

Label profile with an element's elevations Label Profile Elevations

Output surface elevations along an Output Profile Elevations Not Lite

alignment

Output surface elevations for cross sections Output Section Elevations Not Lite

At the moment, cells and thus, most of the tools of the Profiles toolbox do only work in
MicroStation. There is not yet any corresponding element type in Spatix.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Draw Alignment Sections > 228

Draw Alignment Sections

Not Spatix

Draw Alignment Sections tool draws cross sections along an alignment. Each cross section
shows the shape of surface models at a position along the alignment. You can specify the width
of the cross sections as a left and a right width perpendicular from the alignment.

The alignment element can be any linear element. Valid element types include lines, line
strings, curves, arcs, ellipses, shapes, complex chains and complex shapes.

The cross sections are drawn as a group of cells that can be freely positioned anywhere in the
CAD file. The arrangement of the cross sections in the group can be defined in Cross sections /
Placement category of the TerraModeler Settings.

The design of the elevation range grid drawn for each cross sections is defined by settings in
the Draw sections along alignment dialog as well as in Cross sections / Elevation grid category of
the TerraModeler Settings. The cross section cells are drawn into the CAD file on the active
level or on several levels that are defined in Profiles / Levels category of the TerraModeler
Settings.

Optionally, the tool draws markers in the CAD files at places where a cross section has been
generated. The section markers are placed perpendicular to the alignment element and may
include a line and text elements showing the station along the alignment. The symbology of
the line and text element is defined in the Alignment Section Markers dialog opened by the
Markers button of the Draw Sections Along Alignment dialog.

To draw alignment sections:

1. (Optional) Select the alignment element.

2. Select the Draw Alignment Sections tool.

3. Identify the alignment element if it has not been selected in step 1.

The Draw Sections Along Alignment dialog opens:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Draw Alignment Sections > 229

4. Define settings in the dialog.

5. (Optional) Select surfaces for being displayed in cross sections using the Surfaces button. See
Profile surfaces for more information.

6. (Optional) Define settings for cross section labels using the Labels button. See Alignment
section labels for more information.

7. (Optional) Define settings for cross section markers using the Markers button. See Alignment
section markers for more information.

8. Click OK in the Draw Sections Along Alignment dialog.

7The cross section outlines are displayed at the mouse pointer position.

9. Define the location of the group of profile cells in a CAD file top view with a data click.
This draws the cross sections into the CAD file.

SETTING EFFECT
Start station Start station value of the alignment element.
End station End station value defined by the length of the
alignment element:
· Increasing - stations values are increasing
from start to end station.
· Decreasing - station values are decreasing
from start to end station

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Draw Alignment Sections > 230

SETTING EFFECT
From station First station on which a cross section is drawn.
To station Last station from which a cross section can be
drawn.
Interval Station interval between two successive cross
sections. Determines the number of cross
sections drawn.
Left width Cross section width perpendicular to the left
from the alignment.
Right width Cross section width perpendicular to the right
from the alignment.
Draw section markers If on, the location of cross sections are marked
with line and text elements along the
alignment element. The text elements show
the station number and are placed at both end
points of the marker lines.
Horizontal Horizontal scale which defines the intended
plotting scale.
Vertical Vertical scale which defines the elevation
exaggeration as the ratio of horizontal /
vertical scale.
Color Color of the elevation range grid lines and
labels.
Binding Defines how the elevation range changes
along the alignment:
· Stays constant - the range stays the same as
for the first cross section.
· Follows 3d alignment - the range is adjusted
to the elevation of the alignment at the
cross section location.
· Follows surface - the range is adjusted to
the elevation of the selected Surface at the
cross section location.
From Lowest elevation range value for the first
cross section. The 1. z value next to the field
shows the elevation value at the first cross
section location.
To Highest elevation range value for the first
cross section.
Step Vertical step size of the elevation range.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Draw Alignment Sections > 231

SETTING EFFECT
Label binding elevation If on, the binding elevation is labeled by a text
and a guide line in each cross section.

Alignment section labels

The Alignment Section Labels dialog defines settings for labeling offsets and surface elevations
in cross sections. The symbology for offset labels can be defined in Cross sections / Offset
labels category and for surface elevation labels in Cross sections / Elevation labels category of
TerraModeler Settings.

SETTING EFFECT
Label offsets at fixed intervals If on, labels for the offset from the alignment
are drawn below each cross section. The
distance between offset labels is defined in
the Step field. Offset values are negative to
the left and positive to the right of the
alignment.
Draw offset ticks If on, small lines for the offset from the
alignment are drawn at the bottom of each
cross section. The distance between offset
ticks is defined in the Step field.
At fixed intervals If on, surface elevations labels at fixed Steps
are drawn below the cross section.
Draw vertical line If on, a vertical line is drawn at the location of
an elevation label. This is only active if At
fixed intervals is switched on.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Draw Alignment Sections > 232

SETTING EFFECT
At locations If on, elevation labels are drawn at locations
where there is a change in the surface model:
· All triangle edges - locations where the
alignment intersects a triangle edge.
· Breakline edges - locations where the
alignment intersects a breakline edge.
· Slope changes - locations where the slope
changes more than a given Change limit.
· Peaks and pits - local maximum and
minimum elevations.
Label offset of each location If on, an offset label is placed at the location
of an elevation label. This is only active if At
locations is switched on.
Draw vertical line If on, a vertical line is drawn at the location of
an elevation label. This is only active if At
locations is switched on.

Alignment section markers

The Alignment Section Markers dialog defines settings for markers that are placed at locations
where cross sections have been generated. The markers may include text elements that
indicate the station along the alignment.

SETTING EFFECT
Section line Color, weight and style of the marker line.
Uses the active color table and line
weights/styles of the CAD file.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Draw Alignment Sections > 233

SETTING EFFECT
Left end If on, a text element indicating the station
along the alignment is placed at the left end
of the section marker line.
Center If on, a text element indicating the station
along the alignment is placed in the center of
the section marker line.
Right end If on, a text element indicating the station
along the alignment is place at the right end
of the section marker line.
Font Font type used for the text element. The list
contains the fonts available in the CAD file.
Size Size of the text element. Given in CAD file
secondary units.
Color Color and weight of the text element. Uses
the active color table and line weights of the
CAD file.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Draw Profile > 234

Draw Profile
Not Spatix

Draw Profile tool draws a profile along an alignment element. The profile shows the shape of
surface models along the alignment.

The alignment element can be any linear element. Valid element types include lines, line
strings, curves, arcs, ellipses, shapes, complex chains and complex shapes.

A profile is drawn as a cell element that can be freely positioned anywhere in the CAD file.

The horizontal length of the profile cell is equal to the 2D length of the alignment element. The
horizontal scale represents the intended plotting scale of the profile. All text items in the
profile are scaled according to the plotting scale.

The design of the elevation range grid for the profile is defined by settings in the Draw profile
dialog as well as in Profiles / Elevation grid category of the TerraModeler Settings. The profile
cell is drawn into the CAD file on the active level or on several levels that are defined in
Profiles / Levels category of the TerraModeler Settings.

A profile can have a name written on top of the profile. The symbology settings for the name as
well as for bottom row titles of specific layouts can be found in Profiles / Titles category of the
TerraModeler Settings. There is also the option to add additional information at the bottom of
the profile. This is defined in Profiles / Layouts category of the TerraModeler Settings.

To draw a profile:
1. (Optional) Select the alignment element.

2. Select the Draw Profile tool.

3. Identify the alignment element if it has not been selected in step 1.

The Draw profile dialog opens:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Draw Profile > 235

4. Define settings in the dialog.

5. (Optional) Select surfaces for being displayed in profiles using the Surfaces button. See
Profile surfaces for more information.

6. (Optional) Define settings for profile labels using the Labels button. See Profile labels for
more information.

7. Click OK in the Draw profile dialog.

The profile outline is displayed at the mouse pointer position.

8. Define the location of the profile cell in a CAD file top view with a data click.
This draws the profile into the CAD file.

SETTING EFFECT
Name Name drawn on top of the profile.
Layout Layout scheme which defines the data rows
that appear below the elevation grid of the
profile:
· No layout - no data row is drawn below the
profile.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Draw Profile > 236

SETTING EFFECT

· <layout name> - uses the selected layout

scheme which has been defined in Profiles /
Layouts category of TerraModeler Settings.
Horizontal Horizontal scale that defines the intended
plotting scale.
Vertical Vertical scale that defines the elevation
exaggeration as the ratio of horizontal /
vertical scale.
Label Position where scale labels are drawn: Along
axis or Upper corner.
Color Color of the elevation range grid lines and
labels.
Start Lowest elevation of the elevation range.
End Highest elevation of the elevation range.
Step Vertical step size of the elevation range.
Start station Start station value of the alignment element.
End station End station defined by the length of the
alignment element:
· Increasing - station values are increasing
from start to end station.
· Decreasing - station values are decreasing
from start to end station.
Draw only partial alignment If on, the profile is only drawn for a part of the
alignment defined by From station and To
station.

Profile surfaces

The Profile Surfaces dialog provides a list of surface models available for display in profiles. You
can define which profiles are displayed and the symbology for each surface.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Draw Profile > 237

SETTING EFFECT
Draw in profiles If on, the selected surface in the list on the
left side of the dialog is drawn in the profile.
Color Line color for the selected surface. Uses the
active CAD file color table.
Color by domain If on, the color of domain(s) is used. See
Define Domains tool for more information.
Weight Line weight for the selected surface. Uses CAD
file line weights.
Style Line style for the selected surface:
· Standard - uses CAD file standard line styles.
· Custom - the user can define an own line
style based on MicroStation line styles and a
scale. (MicroStation only)
Style name Name of a custom line style. Use the Select
(MicroStation only) button to select a MicroStation line style
definition. This is only active if Style is set to
Custom.
Style scale Scale of a custom line style. This is only active
(MicroStation only) if Style is set to Custom.

The same dialog can be opened using the Edit / Profile settings command from the Surfaces
window.

Profile labels

The Profile labels dialog defines settings for labeling stations and surface elevations in a
profile. The symbology for bottom row labels, station labels, and elevation labels can be
defined in Profiles / Labels category of TerraModeler Settings.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Draw Profile > 238

SETTING EFFECT
Label stations If on, the station values along the alignment
are drawn below the profile.
Step Horizontal step size of alignment stations that
are labeled.
At fixed intervals If on, surface elevation labels are drawn
below the profile at fixed Steps .
Draw vertical line If on, a vertical line is drawn at the location of
an elevation label. This is only active if At
fixed intervals is switched on.
At locations If on, elevation labels are drawn at locations
where there is a change in the surface model:
· All triangle edges - locations where the
alignment intersects a triangle edge.
· Breakline edges - locations where the
alignment intersects a breakline edge.
· Slope changes - locations where the slope
changes more than the given Change limit
value.
· Peaks and pits - local maximum and
minimum elevations.
Label station of each location If on, a station label is placed at the location of
an elevation label. This is only active if At
locations is switched on.
Draw vertical line If on, a vertical line is drawn at the location of
an elevation label. This is only active if At
locations is switched on.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Draw Section View > 239

Draw Section View

Draw Section View tool creates a 3D section view that can be used for design purposes. A
section view is a rotated view along a section line.

A section view is not meant to be plotted on paper. As its name implies, it is a rotated cross
section view drawn at the true 3D position of the section line. This makes it ideal for design
purposes. If you use a section view to place elements, they are drawn to a true 3D position.

The tool draws a line for each surface at the section’s location if the surface type is selected to
be drawn in profiles. The symbology of the line is related to the surface type and determined
by settings in Surface types category in TerraModeler Settings. Optionally, the elevation range
can be drawn including grid lines and labels.

To draw a section view:

1. Select the Draw Section View tool.
This opens the Draw Section View dialog:

2. Define settings in the dialog.

3. Enter the start point and the end point of the section line in a top view.
Continue with step 4 below.
OR

1. Select the center line element of the section view.

2. Select the Draw Section View tool.

3. Define settings in the dialog.

4. Define the section view depth by entering a data click in the top view or by defining the
value in the Depth field.

5. Identify the view to be used as the section view with a data click.

6. If Z range is set to Prompt for, the Section view range dialog opens:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Draw Section View > 240

Define a Start elevation, End elevation, and vertical Step size and click OK.
The view is rotated to show the section with the section line start point on the left and the
section line end point on the right. The depth of the view corresponds to the given depth
value of the section.

SETTING EFFECT
Mode Drawing mode for surface section lines and
elevation range in the section view:
· Write to file - drawn as permanent
elements.
Z range Defines how the elevation range is set:
· None - the elevation range is not drawn.
· Automatic - TerraModeler decides the
elevation range based on surface
elevations.
· Prompt for - the elevation range can be
defined in Section view range dialog.
Level CAD file level for drawing surface section lines
and elevation range.
Text size Text size of elevation range labels.
Depth Section depth on both sides of the section
line. If on, the depth is fixed to the given
value.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Label Profile Elevations > 241

Label Profile Elevations

Not Spatix

Label Profile Elevations tool labels a profile with elevation values. The tool can label a linear
element drawn in the profile or single points identified with data points in the profile.

This tool can be used, for example, with an element representing a vertical alignment that has
been designed in the profile. The element has to be linear. It should not extend beyond the
profile's left or right margin. The tool translates the y-coordinates of the element into elevation
values and writes these values below the profile.

The font, size, and number settings for the labels can be defined in Profiles / Labels category of
TerraModeler Settings. The symbology of the labels is determined by the active symbology
settings in the CAD file.

To label a profile with elevations:

1. Select the Label Profile Elevations tool.
This opens the Label Profile Elevations dialog:

2. Define settings in the dialog.

3. Identify the profile to label.

Continue according to the selected Method.

Method: Linear element

4. Identify a linear element to be labeled.

5. Accept the element.

The element's elevations are labeled. You can continue with step 4.

Method: Single location

4. Move the mouse pointer inside the profile area.

The elevation at the mouse pointer location is displayed.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Label Profile Elevations > 242

5. Enter a data point in order to draw the label into the CAD file.
You can continue with step 5.

SETTING EFFECT
Method Labeling method:
· Linear element - labels elevations of a
linear element at fixed Steps.
· Single location - labels the elevation of a
single data point.
Label station / offset If on, the station value (profiles) or the offset
from an alignment (cross sections) is drawn
for each elevation. For station values the
labeling relies on the settings for bottom row
contents defined in Profiles / Layouts category
of the TerraModeler Settings.
Draw vertical line If on, a vertical line is drawn at each elevation
label location.
Bottom row Distance between the lower boundary of the
profile’s elevation range and the line of
elevation labels. Given as millimeters on
paper.

The Label Profile Elevations tool works only as long as the alignment element for a profile is
drawn in the CAD file. Once the alignment element is deleted, labeling profile elevations is
no longer possible.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Output Profile Elevations > 243

Output Profile Elevations

Not Lite

Output Profile Elevations tool creates a text report which contains surface model elevations
along an alignment element. The elevation positions for the output can be at fixed intervals or
only at locations where there is a change in the shape of the surface model. You can view the
report, print it out, or save it as a text file.

To output elevations along an alignment:

1. Select the Output Profile Elevations tool.

2. Identify the alignment to output elevations along.

3. Accept the highlighted alignment.

This opens the Output Profile Elevations dialog:

4. Define settings.

5. (Optional) Click on the Format button to select options controlling the Profile Output format.

6. Click OK to the Output profile elevations dialog.

This opens a report window which contains the output information. Use the commands from
the File pulldown menu to print the report or save it into a text file.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the surface for which a report is
created.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Output Profile Elevations > 244

SETTING EFFECT
Alignment name Descriptive name for the alignment in the
report.
Start station Station value at the start point of the
alignment element.
End station End station value defined by the length of the
alignment element:
· Increasing - station values are increasing
from start to end station.
· Decreasing - station values are decreasing
from start to end station.
Output at fixed intervals If on, output surface elevations at a fixed
interval. The Step field value determines the
size of the interval.
Output at surface changes If on, output surface elevations at locations
where there is a change in the surface model:
· All triangle edges - locations where the
alignment intersects a triangle edge.
· Breakline edges - locations where the
alignment intersects a breakline edge.
· Slope changes - locations where the slope
changes more than a given limit.
· Peaks and pits - local maximum and
minimum elevations.

Profile output format

The Profile Output Format dialog provides some choices for formatting the output of the
Output Profile Elevations tool.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Output Profile Elevations > 245

The output file may contain some starting rows including Header, Surface name, and Alignment
name. Each generates one output line if selected.

Each elevation position is written in one line. You can select what information fields are
included in the output: Station, Easting, Northing, and Elevation.

When using Output at fixed intervals, the application computes elevation positions at fixed
intervals along the alignment. Some of these positions may be outside the surface model. The
Outside field determines if outside positions are written and what text is used for the output.

When using Output at surface changes with All triangle edges as locations, the application
generates output positions only at triangle edges. The alignment may go outside the surface
model in between the generated positions. If Write row is on, the application outputs a line
between the positions to indicate that the alignment is outside the surface model or goes
through a hole in the model.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Output Section Elevations > 246

Output Section Elevations

Not Lite

Output Section Elevations tool creates a text report which contains surface model elevations
from cross sections along an alignment element. The cross section positions for the output can
be at fixed intervals or only at locations where there is a change in the shape of the surface
model. You can view the report, print it out, or save it as a text file.

To output elevations from alignment sections:

1. Select the Output Section Elevations tool.

2. Identify the alignment for the sections.

3. Accept the highlighted alignment.

This opens the Output Section Elevations dialog:

4. Define settings.

5. Select surfaces from the list in the lower part of the dialog. Only selected surfaces are
included in the output.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Output Section Elevations > 247

6. (Optional) Click on the Format button to select options controlling the Section output format.

7. Click OK to the Output Section Elevations dialog.

This opens a report window which contains the output information. Use the commands from
the File pulldown menu to print the report or save it into a text file.

SETTING EFFECT
Alignment name Descriptive name for the alignment in the
report.
Start station Station value at the start point of the
alignment element.
End station End station value defined by the length of the
alignment element:
· Increasing - station values are increasing
from start to end station.
· Decreasing - station values are decreasing
from start to end station.
From station First station on which a cross section is
included in the output.
To station Last station from which a cross section can be
included in the output.
Interval Station interval between two successive cross
sections. Determines the number of cross
sections in the output.
Left width Cross section width perpendicular to the left
from the alignment.
Right width Cross section width perpendicular to the right
from the alignment.
Output at fixed intervals If on, output surface elevations at a fixed
interval along the cross section. The Step field
determines the size of the interval.
Output at surface changes If on, output surface elevations at locations
where there is a change in the surface model:
· All triangle edges - locations where the
alignment intersects a triangle edge.
· Breakline edges - locations where the
alignment intersects a breakline edge.
· Slope changes - locations where the slope
changes more than a given limit.
· Peaks and pits - local maximum and
minimum elevations.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Output Section Elevations > 248

Section output format

The Section Output Format dialog provides some choices for formatting the output of the
Output Section Elevations tool.

The output file may contain some starting rows including Header, Alignment name and Surface
count. Each generates one output line if selected.

If Section start is switched on, a line is written to indicate the start of a new cross section. You
can specify the prefix text appearing before the station value.

If Surface start field is switched on, a line is written to indicate the start of a new surface. You
can specify the prefix text appearing before the surface name.

Each elevation position of a cross section is written in one line. You can select what information
fields are included in the output: Offset, Easting, Northing, and Elevation.

When using Output at fixed intervals, the application computes elevation positions at fixed
intervals along the cross section. Some of these positions may be outside the surface model.
The Outside field determines if outside positions are written and what text is used for the
output.

When using Output at surface changes with All triangle edges as locations, the application
generates output positions only at triangle edges. The alignment may go outside the surface
model in between the generated positions. If Write row is on, the application outputs a line

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Output Section Elevations > 249

between the positions to indicate that the cross section is outside the surface model or goes
through a hole in the model.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Project From Profile > 250

Project From Profile

Not Spatix

Project From Profile tool projects elements from a profile into their 3D position. The tool
creates a copy of the elements that run along the profile's alignment.

The tool can be used, for example, with an element representing a vertical alignment that has
been designed in the profile. The element has to be linear. It should not extend beyond the
profile's left or right margin.

The tool creates a new 3D element of type complex chain running along the profile's alignment.
The symbology of the new element is determined by the active symbology in the CAD file.

To project element(s) from a profile:

1. Select the Project From Profile tool.
The Project From Profile dialog opens:

2. Enter a Horizontal step value in order to define the maximum distance between consecutive
vertices along the new 3D element.

3. Identify the profile from which the element(s) are projected.

4. Identify an element to project.

5. Accept the element with another data click.

The element is projected into a new 3D complex chain running along the profile's alignment.
You can continue with step 3.
OR

1. Select element(s) to project.

2. Select the Project From Profile tool.

3. Enter a Horizontal step value in order to define the maximum distance between consecutive
vertices along the new 3D element.

4. Identify the profile from which the element(s) are projected.

5. Accept the element(s) with another data click.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Project From Profile > 251

The Project from Profile tool works only as long as the alignment element for a profile is
drawn in the CAD file. Once the alignment element is deleted, the projection of element
from a profile is no longer possible.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Project Into Profile > 252

Project Into Profile

Not Spatix

Project Into Profile tool projects 3D elements into a profile. This tool creates a copy of the
element with its coordinates translated into the profile's coordinate system.

The element to be projected has to be a cell or a linear element. The element should be
positioned within the extents of the profile alignment.

Linear elements are projected as a line string or a complex chain into profile cells. The
application calculates a line string that approximates an arc, an ellipse, or a curve. The
symbology of the elements in the profile is determined by the symbology of the original
element.

To project element(s) into a profile:

1. Select the Project Into Profile tool.

2. Identify a profile into which the element(s) are projected.

3. Identify an element to project.

4. Accept the element with another data click.

The element is projected into the profile. You can continue with step 3.
OR

1. Select element(s) to project.

2. Select the Project Into Profile tool.

3. Identify a profile into which the element(s) are projected.

4. Accept the element(s) with another data click.

The element(s) are projected into the profile.

The Project Into Profile tool works only as long as the alignment element for a profile is
drawn in the CAD file. Once the alignment element is deleted, the projection of element
into a profile is no longer possible.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Setup Automatic Sections > 253

Setup Automatic Sections

Setup Automatic Sections tool defines views and symbology settings for displaying surface
models in section views automatically. The settings are used by several tools in TerraScan, such
as Draw Vertical Section, Rotate Section, Cut Section, Synchronize Views and Travel Path. The
surface(s) are drawn as lines in the section views. The display option can be used, for example,
to compare laser data elevations with surface elevations.

To setup automatic sections:

1. Select the Setup Automatic Sections tool.
This opens the Automatic Sections dialog:

2. Select view(s) in which the surfaces are to be displayed.

3. Click on the Colors button.

This opens the Profile surfaces dialog.

4. Define symbology settings for surfaces that are drawn in section views.

5. Click OK to the Profile surfaces dialog.

The surface(s) are now displayed in section views that are created by TerraScan tools. The
display is active as long as a view is selected in the Automatic Sections dialog. Thus, you may
close the Automatic Sections dialog.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Profiles toolbox > Update Profile > 254

Update Profile
Not Spatix

Update Profile tool updates profile cell(s) after surface models or alignment elements were
modified. The tool redraws the selected cells.

To update a profile:
1. Select profile cell(s) to update.

2. Select the Update Profile tool.

The selected cell(s) are redrawn.

The Update Profile tool works only as long as the alignment element for a profile is drawn in
the CAD file. Once the alignment element is deleted, the update is no longer possible.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > > 255

Quantity toolbox
The Quantity toolbox contains tools that can be used to compute quantities between surface
models or between surface models and cross sections of trenches, to find the intersection
between two surfaces or to compute surface model areas. Further, there is a tool for computing
tunnel volumes based on tunnel cross sections.

Compute Quantity is probably used most often. It calculates volumes between two surfaces
using the grid method. It can calculate volumes from entire surface models or from areas
restricted by a fence or selected polygon.

Define Section Templates and Compute Section Quantity tools can be used for calculating
volumes along an alignment. The calculation is based on the traditional end-area method.

TO USE TOOL

Compute quantities using grid method Compute Quantity

Compute quantities using prismoidal Compute Prismoidal Quantity Not Lite

method

Compute quantities along an alignment Compute Alignment Quantity Not Lite

Define section templates for trenches Define Section Templates Not Lite

Compute trench quantities using section Compute Section Quantity Not Lite
templates

Compute tunnel volume from section Compute Tunnel Volume Not Lite
elements

Draw intersection of two surfaces Draw Surface Intersection

Compute surface area Compute Area Not Lite

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Alignment Quantity > 256

Compute Alignment Quantity

Not Lite

Compute Alignment Quantity tool computes quantities along an alignment element. The tool
uses the grid method for computing quantities between two surfaces.

The alignment can be defined by a linear element, such as a 3D line string or complex chain. The
area of calculation is limited by the extension of the alignment element. It may be further
limited by another surface model.

The surfaces can be defined by surface models in TerraModeler or by points loaded in

TerraScan.

The results of the computation are shown in the tool’s dialog. They can be presented
graphically in the CAD file and a text report can be stored as well.

To compute quantities along an alignment:

1. Select an alignment element.

2. Select the Compute Alignment Quantity tool.

The Compute Alignment Quantities dialog opens:

3. Define settings for the computation related to the alignment element.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Alignment Quantity > 257

SETTING EFFECT
Start station Station value at the start point of the
alignment element.
End station End station value defined by the length of the
alignment element:
· Increasing - station values are increasing
from start to end station.
· Decreasing - station values are decreasing
from start to end station.
From station Start station value for the quantity
computation.
To station End station value for the quantity
computation.
Left width Defines the computation area boundary
parallel to the left from the alignment.
Right width Defines the computation area boundary
parallel to the right from the alignment.
Print to file If on, the results of the computation are saved
into a simple text file.
Draw into design If on, the boundaries of the computation area
and a linear scale of the alignment are drawn
into the CAD file. The scale is divided into
sections of the length defined by the Interval
value.
For each section, the rounded calculated
quantity value is displayed.

4. Click on the Calculation button.

This opens another Compute Alignment Quantities dialog:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Alignment Quantity > 258

5. Define settings related to surface models, computation steps, and display of the results.

6. Click on the Calculate button.

The computation of the quantities starts. The results are displayed in the Compute alignment
dialog on the right side and possibly in the CAD file. If Print to file was selected in the first
dialog, a standard Windows dialog opens to define the location for storing the text file on a
hard disk.

SETTING EFFECT
Upper surface Name of the upper surface model for quantity
calculation. The use of Laser points requires
that the points which define the surface are
loaded into TerraScan.
Lower surface Name of the lower surface for quantity
calculation. The use of Laser points requires
that the points which define the surface are
loaded into TerraScan.
Limit Limiting surface to restrict the calculation
area:
· None - no limiting surface used.
· Area - calculate only within the Limit surface
area.
· Lower limit - calculate only above Limit
surface.
· Upper limit - calculate only below Limit
surface.
Limit surface Surface to limit the calculation area. This is not
active if Limit is set to None.
Step Defines the grid size for the calculation. A
small step produces more accurate results but

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Alignment Quantity > 259

SETTING EFFECT
the calculation process takes longer.
Surf cut limit The software computes the cut volume
separately for places where the cut depth is
less than this value. This may be used for
billing purposes if the price is not based on
the cut volume but on the cut area.
Display Display method for presenting the calculation
results graphically in the CAD file:
· No display - nothing is drawn into the CAD
file.
· Display only - draws temporary elements.
· Write to file - draws permanent elements
into the CAD file on the active level.
Draw as Elements used to present the results
graphically:
· Vertical lines - a vertical line is drawn at the
center of each calculated grid cell. This is
the only available option if Display is set to
Display only.
· Horizontal lines - a horizontal lines is drawn
for each calculated grid cell row.
· Filled shapes - a shape is drawn for each
calculated grid cell row.
· Pillars - a 3D block is drawn for each
calculated grid cell. Each block is build from
4 shape elements which may end up with a
big number of elements to draw.
Color list next to calculation result line Defines the display color for drawing the
results in the CAD file. Uses the active color
table of the CAD file.

TerraModeler has two tools for computing quantities along an alignment. Compute
Alignment Quantity tool calculates volumes using the grid method and requires that you
have an existing surface model for the excavation/accumulation. Compute Section Quantity
tool uses section templates to define the excavation/accumulation and calculates volumes
using the end-area method.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Area > 260

Compute Area
Not Lite

Compute Area tool computes the area covered by a surface model. It calculates values for both,
the two-dimensional and the three-dimensional area.

The 3D value is the true surface area of the triangles. The 2D value is computed using only x and
y coordinates of the triangle vertices.

You can use a fence or selected shape element(s) to define the area for calculation. The area of
computation can be further limited to a specific domain or to a given slope range.

To compute surface area:

1. Select the Compute Area tool.
The Compute Area dialog opens:

2. Define settings and click on the Calculate button.

The computation starts. The results are displayed in the lower part of the tool’s dialog and
possibly in the CAD file.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the surface model for area
calculation.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Area > 261

SETTING EFFECT
Compute Area to compute:
· Whole surface - whole surface model.
· Fence contents - only inside a MicroStation
fence. (MicroStation only)
· Selected shapes - only inside selected
shape element(s).
Domain If on, compute only triangles assigned to the
selected domain.
Slope If on, compute only triangles within a given
slope range. The lower and upper limits are
defined as slope percentages.
Paint calculated area If on, draw each calculated triangle as a
temporary shape element into the CAD file.
Doesn't work in MicroStation CONNECT.
Label 3d area of each shape If on, the computed 3D area value of each
shape is drawn inside the shape as a
permanent text element. This is only active if
Compute is set to Selected shapes.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Prismoidal Quantity > 262

Compute Prismoidal Quantity

Not Lite

Compute Prismoidal Quantity tool computes quantities between two surfaces and produce
results summing up both, cut and fill volumes. The calculation is based on a prismoidal method:
the application compares the triangles of the two surfaces. This is the mathematically accurate
method for computing quantities.

You can use a fence or a selected shape element to limit the area for calculation.

To compute quantities using prismoidal method:

1. Select the Compute Prismoidal Quantity tool.
The Compute Prismoidal Quantity dialog opens:

2. Define settings and click Compute.

The computation results are displayed in the Compute prismoidal quantity dialog and
possibly in the CAD file.

SETTING EFFECT
Upper surface Name of the upper surface model for the
quantity calculation.
Lower surface Name of the lower surface model for the
quantity calculation.
Inside fence If on, the calculation takes place only inside a
fence or a selected shape element.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Prismoidal Quantity > 263

SETTING EFFECT
Display Display method for presenting the calculation
results graphically in the CAD file:
· No display - nothing is drawn into the CAD
file.
· Draw temporarily - temporary display of
triangles. Disappears if the tool is
deactivated.
· Write to file - draws triangles as permanent
elements into the CAD file on the active
level.
Color list next to calculation result line Defines the display color for drawing the
results in the CAD file. Uses the active color
table of the CAD file.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Quantity > 264

Compute Quantity
Compute Quantity tool computes quantities between two surfaces and produces results
summing up both, cut and fill volumes. The calculation is based on a grid method. You can
control the accuracy and speed of calculation by defining the grid size.

You can use a fence or a selected shape element to define the area for calculation. The
computation area can be further limited by another surface.

The surfaces for volume calculation can be defined by surface models loaded in TerraModeler
or by points loaded in TerraScan.

The tool provides several options for creating text reports of the quantity calculation results.
The results are presented in a separate report windows from which a text file can be saved or
the report can be printed directly. Besides a simple report for the overall calculation results,
there is also the possibility to output See Quantity reports for subregions.

To compute quantities using the grid method:

1. Select the Compute Quantity tool.
The Compute Quantity dialog opens:

2. Define settings.

3. If a text report for subregions should be created, click on the Reporting button to define
settings for the output. See See Quantity reports for subregions for more information.

4. Click on the Calculate button to start the computation.

The computation results are displayed on the right side of the Compute Quantity dialog, and
possibly in the CAD file and a separate report window.
The results of the calculation for the whole area can be saved into a simple text report using
the Print button in the Compute Quantity dialog.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Quantity > 265

The Erase display button appears if the results of the quantity computation have been
displayed with setting Display only. Then, the button can be used to remove the temporary
elements that illustrate the computation result. The temporary elements also disappear if
the Compute Quantity dialog is closed.

SETTING EFFECT
Upper surface Name of the upper surface model for the
quantity calculation. If Laser points is
selected, the field for entering class
number(s) becomes active. This requires
that respective laser points are loaded in
TerraScan.
Opens the Select classes dialog which
contains the list of active classes in
TerraScan. You can select multiple source
classes from the list that are then used in
the class number field of the Upper surface.
Lower surface Name of the lower surface model for the
quantity calculation. If Laser points is
selected, the field for entering class
number(s) becomes active. Use the >>
button in order to open the Select classes
dialog for class selection. This requires that
respective laser points are loaded in
TerraScan.
Opens the Select classes dialog which
contains the list of active classes in
TerraScan. You can select multiple source
classes from the list that are then used in
the class number field of the Lower surface.
Limit Limiting surface to restrict the calculation
area:
· None - no limiting surface used.
· Area - calculate only within the Limit
surface area.
· Lower limit - calculate only above Limit
surface.
· Upper limit - calculate only below Limit
surface.
Limit surface Surface to limit the calculation area. This is
not active if Limit is set to None.
Inside fence If on, the calculation takes place only inside
a fence or a selected shape element.
Step
Defines the grid size for the calculation. A
small step produces more accurate results

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Quantity > 266

SETTING EFFECT
but the calculation process takes longer.
Surf cut limit The software computes the cut volume
separately for places where the cut depth is
less than this value. This may be used for
billing purposes if the price is not based on
the cut volume but on the cut area.
Display Display method for presenting the
calculation results graphically in the CAD
file:
· No display - nothing is drawn into the CAD
file.
· Display only - draws temporary vertical
line elements.
· Write to file - draws permanent elements
on the active level.
Draw as Elements used to present the results
graphically:
· Vertical lines - a vertical line is drawn at
the center of each calculated grid cell.
This is the only available option if Display
is set to Display only.
· Horizontal lines - a horizontal lines is
drawn for each calculated grid cell row.
· Filled shapes - a shape is drawn for each
calculated grid cell row.
· Pillars - a 3D block is drawn for each
calculated grid cell. Each block is build
from 4 shape elements which may end up
with a big number of elements to draw.
Color list next to calculation result line Defines the display color for drawing the
results in the CAD file. Uses the active color
table of the CAD file.

Quantity reports for subregions

The Quantity reporting dialog provides an option to create output reports of quantity
computations for subregions. In addition, a text file can be created that stores variable - value
pairs.

Subregions and their names in the report can be defined in several ways:

· Coordinate blocks - the software divides the computation area automatically into squared
blocks of a given size. The corner coordinates of the blocks are full meter coordinate values.
The names for the subregions are automatically generated from the lower left corner
coordinates of each block.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Quantity > 267

· Selected shapes - subregions are defined by selected shapes. This is useful for creating
output values for distributed computation areas that are not adjacent to each other. The
names for the subregions can be defined by text elements that is placed inside the shapes
and selected together with the shapes. The software uses the selected text element whose
origin point is inside a selected shape for naming the respective subregion in the report. In
addition, if the text element ends with a numerical value, this can be used as a multiplier for
the calculated quantities. This may be useful, for example, if a material has a certain density
which effects the volume of this material. If no text element is used, the subregions are
named automatically with "Region 1", "Region 2", etc.
· Elevation range - the computation is performed for a given elevation or depth range. A
subregion is defined by a given elevation or depth value interval. The subregions are named
automatically by the range values.
A report can include both, results for horizontal regions and for vertical ranges.

A variable text file can be created for horizontal regions only. The file saves a variable name
and its value into a comma-separated text file. Each variable - value pair is written into a new
line which starts with the # character. The file starts with the Metadata variables, followed by
variables for each region, and finally the total values for the whole computation area.

The variable names for each region are a combination of the subregions name and the variable
name separated by a underline character, for example, Region 1_CUT for the cut volume of a
subregion, or Example1_FILL for the fill volume of a region named Example1 .

To setup quantity reports for subregions:

1. Click on the Reporting button in the Compute Quantity dialog.
The Quantity reporting dialog opens:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Quantity > 268

2. Define settings according to your needs for the output report.

3. Click OK.

4. You can continue with Calculate in the Compute Quantity dialog.

If one of the options in the Quantity reporting dialog is switched on, an Output report
window is displayed. Use the commands from the File pulldown menu in the report window
to save the report as a text file or to print it directly.
If Variables is set to Write text file in the Quantity reporting dialog, the file storing variable -
value pairs is created and saved at the given location on a hard disk.

SETTING EFFECT
Report title Free text that is used as title in the report.
Report subtotals by regions If on, the quantity calculation results are
reported for each region separately.
Regions Method of how regions are defined:
· Coordinate blocks - regions are defined by
squared blocks with an edge length of the
given Block size value.
· Selected shapes - regions are defined by
selected shape elements
Labels end with density If on, a numeric value at the end of a text
element inside a region is used as a multiplier
to all volume values calculated for this region.
This is only active if Regions is set to Selected
shapes .
Hilite problems If on, region shapes without a text element
inside are highlighted.
Variables Determines if a variable text file is written
and saved:
· Do not write - no text file is written.
· Write text file - a text file written and saved
at the given File location.
Metadata The button opens the Quantity metadata
dialog. The metadata is included at the
beginning of the variable text file.
Report subtotals by elevation If on, the quantity calculation results are
reported for defined elevation or depth
ranges.
Report by
Defines the type of range for the report:
· Elevation - quantities are reported for
defined elevation ranges.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Quantity > 269

SETTING EFFECT

· Depth - quantities are reported for defined

depth ranges.
From Start value of the elevation/depth range for
the report.
To End value of the elevation/depth range for
the report.
Step Elevation or depth interval that defines the
vertical size of the subregions.
Order Defines what is stored in the rows and
columns of the report: Regions as rows or
Subtotals in rows.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Section Quantity > 270

Compute Section Quantity

Not Lite

Compute Section Quantity tool lets you attach section templates to station ranges along an
alignment element. This template list can be used for computing quantities and for generating
an excavation based on the cross section templates. The section templates must be defined
with the Define Section Templates tool before they can be used for section quantity
computation.

The alignment can be defined by a linear element, such as a 3D line string or complex chain. The
area of calculation is limited by the extensions of the alignment element and the section
template(s).

The excavation is computed related to one or two surfaces. The surfaces can be defined by
surface models loaded in TerraModeler.

The results of the computation are shown in the tool’s dialog. They can be presented
graphically in the CAD file and a text report can be stored as well.

To attach templates to an alignment:

1. Select an alignment element.

2. Select the Compute Section Quantity tool.

The Define Alignment Section Templates dialog opens:

The template list contains rows with a station value range and the name of an assigned
section template. A gap between station ranges of successive rows is interpreted as a linear
transformation between two template types. You can skip a station range by selecting
template type None. Such a station range is not included in the calculation.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Section Quantity > 271

SETTING EFFECT
Start station Station value at the start point of the
alignment element.
End station End station value defined by the length of
the alignment element:
· Increasing - station values are increasing
from start to end station.
· Decreasing - station values are decreasing
from start to end station

TO CHOOSE BUTTON/MENU COMMAND

Add a new station range to the list. Add
Modify the template for a selected station Edit
range.
Delete a selected station range from the list. Delete
Start the quantity calculation based on the Calculation
template list.
Load a previously saved template list file File / Load
from a hard disk.
Save a template list into a text file on a hard File / Save as
disk.
Draw the section templates into cross Draw / In sections
sections. The cross sections must be created
in advance along the same alignment
elements using the Draw Alignment Sections
tool.

3. Use the Add button to add a new template to the list.

OR

3. Use the Edit button to edit a selected template.

This opens the Template for alignment interval dialog:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Section Quantity > 272

4. Define From station and To station values in order to define the station range for using this
template.

5. Select a section template form the list of Section templates that is used for the given section
range.

6. Click OK.
The template is added to the list in the Define alignment section templates dialog. You can
continue with step 3 until templates for all station ranges are defined.
It is recommended to save the template list into a file that can be reloaded into the dialog.
Select Save as command from the File menu to create a simple text file with the extension
*.KLS.

7. Click on the Calculation button in the Define alignment section templates dialog.
This closes the list and opens the Compute Alignment Quantities dialog:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Section Quantity > 273

8. Define settings and click Calculate.

This starts the quantity computation. The results are displayed in the lower part of the
Compute alignment dialog and possibly in the CAD file. If Print to file was selected in the
first dialog, a standard Windows dialog opens to define the location for storing the text file
on a hard disk.

SETTING EFFECT
From station Start station value for the quantity
computation.
To station End station value for the quantity
computation.
Step Defines the distance between consecutive
section templates for the calculation. A small
step produces more accurate results but the
calculation process takes longer.
Calculate Defines how to calculate the excavation
related to existing surface models:
· Entire trench - the quantity of excavation is
computed for the area enclosed by a surface
model and the trench boundaries defined
by the section templates.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Section Quantity > 274

SETTING EFFECT

· Layer - the quantities of excavation is

computed for the area between two surface
models and the trench boundaries defined
by the section templates.
Upper surface Name of the upper surface for quantity
calculation.
Lower surface Name of the lower surface for quantity
calculation. This is only active if Calculate is
set to Layer.
Print to file If on, the results of the computation are saved
into a simple text file.
Draw into design If on, a linear scale of the alignment is drawn
into the CAD file. The scale is divided into
sections of the length defined by the Interval
value. For each section, the rounded
calculated cut volume value is displayed.
Draw Display method for presenting the calculation
results graphically in the CAD file:
· Temporarily - temporary display of
elements. Disappears if the tool is
deactivated.
· Permanently - draws permanent elements
into the CAD file on the active level.
Color list next to calculation result line Defines the display color for drawing the
results in the CAD file. Uses the active color
table of the CAD file.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Tunnel Volume > 275

Compute Tunnel Volume

Not Lite

Compute Tunnel Volume tool computes the volume of a tunnel defined by cross section
elements drawn into their true 3D positions. The cross section elements may represent the
design of a new tunnel or may be created based on the point cloud from a terrestrial or mobile
laser scanner. The tool does not rely on surface models loaded in TerraModeler.

The cross section elements must be closed vector elements, such as shapes or complex shapes,
drawn perpendicular to an alignment element that runs along the tunnel. The interval between
consecutive cross sections may vary.

The volume can be computed for the whole tunnel area defined by the cross sections. Upper
and lower elevation values can be defined for limiting the calculation to the area between the
limit(s) and the cross section boundaries. The limits are given in absolute elevation values.

The tool can also compute multiple volumes for several elevation intervals within the cross
sections. Then, the upper or lower elevation limit is moved within the tunnel area between
two absolute elevation values in steps of a given size. The volumes are reported for each
elevation interval defined by the lowest or highest elevation value and the moving elevation
limit.

To compute tunnel volume:

1. Select the Compute Tunnel Volume tool.
This opens the Compute Tunnel Volume dialog:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Tunnel Volume > 276

The upper list contains a list of alignments along which tunnel sections are used for the
computation. The lower list displays all the tunnel cross sections defined for the alignment
selected in the upper list.

2. Select an alignment element running along a tunnel.

3. Click Add next to the upper list to add the selected alignment.
This opens the Tunnel Alignment dialog:

4. Type a Name for the alignment, define a Start station value, and click OK.

5. Select the row of the alignment in the upper list box of the Compute Tunnel Volume dialog.

6. Select cross section elements for the selected alignment.

7. Click Add next to the lower list to add the selected cross sections.

8. Validate the created list of cross sections. Make sure that station positions and cross section
areas make sense.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Compute Tunnel Volume > 277

9. Click Compute to start the volume computation.

This opens the Report Tunnel Volume dialog:

10. Define settings and click OK.

This computes the volume and displays a report. You can save the report as a text file or print
it directly by using the corresponding commands from the File menu in the Output window.

SETTING EFFECT
Report Method of volume reporting:
· One volume - calculates one volume for the
complete tunnel area defined by the cross
sections.
· Multiple volumes - calculates volumes for
multiple elevation steps within the tunnel
and the cross sections.
Upper limit If on, the volume is calculated from the tunnel
floor up to the given elevation value. This is
only active if Report is set to One volumes.
Lower limit If on, the volume is calculated from the given
elevation value up to the tunnel roof. This is
only active if Report is set to One volumes.
Move Limit that is moved to define the elevation
steps for multiple volume calculation: Upper
limit or Lower limit. This is only active if
Report is set to Multiple volumes.
First First elevation value included in volume
calculation. This is only active if Report is set
to Multiple volumes.
Last Last elevation value included in volume
calculation. This is only active if Report is set
to Multiple volumes.
Step Size of an elevation interval for volume
calculation. This is only active if Report is set
to Multiple volumes.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Define Section Templates > 278

Define Section Templates

Not Lite

Define Section Templates tool lets you create a list section templates, which are, for example,
definitions of typical trench cross sections.

TerraModeler cross sections templates are meant to be used for computing trench excavation
quantities with the Compute Section Quantity tool. The cross section templates are
automatically saved into a file using the same directory and name as the active CAD file. The
file extension is *.KDB. For example, if the active CAD file is D:\DGN\PROJ12.DGN, the section
templates are saved to and loaded from the file D:\DGN\PROJ12.KDB.

To add or edit section templates:

1. Select the Define Section Templates tool.
This opens the Select Section Template dialog:

The dialog shows section templates that have been defined earlier and saved into a .KDB
file.
Click OK.
The Define Section Templates dialog opens:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Define Section Templates > 279

2. Use the Add button to add new template definitions to the list.
OR

2. Use the Edit button to edit a selected section template.

This opens the Section Template dialog which is used to define a section template:

A small circle in the center of the template preview symbolizes the spot where an alignment
element goes through. Dz specifies an initial depth below that spot.
The shape of the cross section is defined as component lists that extend to the left and to the
right from the initial Dz point. A component can be a line or a slope. A line has a vertical and a
horizontal distance. A slope has a fixed angle at which it extends until it reaches a specified
surface.

3. Enter a Name for the section template and a Dz value.

4. Define components for the left and right side of the section by clicking on the respective Add
line or Add slope buttons in the Section Template dialog. You can delete the last added
component using the Delete last buttons.

Add line opens the Template Line Component Add slope opens the Template Slope
dialog: Component dialog:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Define Section Templates > 280

· Horizontal dist - XY distance between the

initial dz point or the end point of the last
section component and the next point.
· Vertical dist - Z distance between the initial
dz point or the end point of the last section
component and the next point.
· Angle - gradient of the slope. Positiv or
negativ values between 0 and 90 degree
are possible.
· Onto surface - name of the surface
model to which the slope is extended.
The list contains surface models loaded
in TerraModeler.

5. After a section has been defined, click OK in the Section Template dialog.
This adds the new template to the list or applies the changes to an existing template.

6. Close the Define Section Templates dialog.

This saves the *.KDB file to the hard disk.
You can use the Delete button in the Define Section Templates dialog in order to delete a
selected section template.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Quantity toolbox > Draw Surface Intersection > 281

Draw Surface Intersection

Draw Surface Intersection calculates the intersection of two surfaces and draws linear elements
along the intersection. These linear elements represent the line of intersection along which
the two surfaces have exactly the same elevation.

When calculating the line of intersection, TerraModeler compares individual triangles from the
two surfaces with each other. If the planes of two triangles intersect each other, the
intersection is drawn as a line segment. Thus, the intersection line might be represented by
quite complex line strings or even by several line elements.

This tool can be used, for example, when computing cut and fill volumes as it creates a linear
element showing the location where two surfaces have the same elevation. The line of
intersection is the boundary between cut and fill areas of the two surfaces.

To draw intersection of two surfaces:

1. Select the Draw Surface Intersection tool.
The Intersect Surfaces dialog opens:

2. Select the two surfaces and click OK.

This starts the calculation of the intersection line. The line is drawn into the CAD file using
active level and symbology settings in the CAD file.

SETTING EFFECT
Use fence If on, the intersection is calculated for an
area that is defined by a fence: Inside or
Outside the fence. (MicroStation only)

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Regions toolbox > > 282

Regions toolbox
Not Lite, Not UAV

The tools in the Regions toolbox are used to create, manage, delete, and update regions.

Regions are another method to divide an area into thematic subareas, the regions. From linear
region boundaries the tools can create and update closed shapes. A center point identifies the
region and links it to thematic information.

Region definitions can be used for:

· labeling surface areas

· using color-filled shapes for visualization purposes
· create pattern for boundaries and region areas for visualization purposes

Settings related to regions can be found in Regions / Region design category, Regions / Region
levels category, Regions / Region types category and Regions / Title formats category of the
TerraModeler Settings.

In contrast to tools in the Domains toolbox, region tools do not rely on surface models or relate
to the triangle structure of surfaces.

TO USE TOOL

Open regions window Regions Not Lite, Not UAV

Create a new region definition Create Region Not Lite, Not UAV

Delete existing region definition Delete Region Not Lite, Not UAV

Edit region information Edit Region Info Not Lite, Not UAV

Move region center point and title Move Region Center Not Lite, Not UAV

Update region definitions (modified

Update Regions Not Lite, Not UAV
boundaries)

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Regions toolbox > Create Region > 283

Create Region
Not Lite, Not UAV

Create Region tool creates a new region definition. A region is defined by boundary lines that
form closed areas. When a region is created, the region definition is added to the list in the
Regions window and a center marker is placed inside the boundary lines.

The software creates a region from lines that are visible in a top view and form a closed area
around the region center point. The elevation of the lines also effect the elevation of the
region shapes. It is recommended to work with 2D elements or at a single elevation level when
working with regions. If necessary, the correct elevation values can be assigned to the final
region shapes by using, for example, Linear Elevation tool or Drop Element On Surface tool in
TerraModeler, or the Drape Linear Element tool together with point cloud data in TerraScan.

The boundary line network should form closed areas in order to ensure that regions can be
created. However, the lines can overlap each other or be located on different CAD file levels.
There are some tolerances regarding gaps in the line network that are defined in Regions /
Region design category of the TerraModeler Settings.

Each region belongs to a region types. A region type can refer to, for example, a category of
land use. The region type determines the symbology used for visualizing the regions. Region
types are defined in Regions / Region types category of the TerraModeler Settings.

When a region is created, a center marker is placed inside the region area. The center marker
can be labeled with a so-called title. The title can include some information about the region. It
is drawn as text element into the CAD file. Title formats are defined in Regions / Title formats
category of the TerraModeler Settings.

To create a new region definition:

1. Select the Create Region tool.

2. Click inside boundary lines that define the region area.

This opens the Region Information dialog:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Regions toolbox > Create Region > 284

3. Define settings for the new region.

4. Click OK.
This adds the region definition to the list. You can continue with step 2.

SETTING EFFECT
Type Type of the new region. See Regions / Region
types category for instruction how to define
region types.
Title Title format for labeling the new region. See
Regions / Title formats category for
instruction how to define region titles.
Name Free text that is used a name for the new
region.
Number Number of the region. Counts up
automatically.
Info Free text that is used as additional
information about the new region.
Margin Area added around a region as a placeholder,
for example, for line pattern that need more
space than a simple line. The region is shrunk
by this value in order to avoid overlap
between adjacent regions when using
different line pattern for the display.
Boundaries locked If on, the region is not recomputed when
using the Update Regions tool after the
boundary line elements were modified.
Hole in
If on, the new region is defined as a hole. If
the area of the new region is completely

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Regions toolbox > Create Region > 285

SETTING EFFECT
surrounded by another region, the option is
switched on automatically. The name of the
surrounding region is displayed next to the
Select button.
If the region should not form a hole, click on
the Select button and select Not a hole in the
Select parent region dialog.

Create region tool does not draw the region shape or any other display into the CAD file. Use
Update Regions tool in order to display the region.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Regions toolbox > Delete Region > 286

Delete Region
Not Lite, Not UAV

Delete Region tool deletes a region definition. The region must be drawn in the CAD file by the
Update Regions tool in order to be deleted with this tool.

You may use the Region / Delete command to perform the same action for selected regions in
the Regions window. The command can also remove regions that are not drawn into the CAD
file.

To delete a region:
1. Select the Delete Region tool.

2. Move the mouse pointer inside a top view.

The region at the mouse pointer location is highlighted.

3. Identify the region to be deleted with a data click inside the region.
The software asks you to confirm the deletion process.

4. Click Yes in the alert dialog.

This deletes the region definition and all related elements. You can continue with step 2.

The region display is always linked to the region definition. If a region definition is deleted,
all display elements are deleted as well.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Regions toolbox > Edit Region Info > 287

Edit Region Info

Not Lite, Not UAV

Edit Region Info tool enables the modification of thematic information of a region.

To change region information:

1. Select the Edit Region Info tool.

2. Move the mouse pointer inside a top view.

The region at the mouse pointer location is highlighted.

3. Identify the region to be modified with a data click.

This opens the Region Information dialog:

4. Modify the information for the region.

5. Click OK in order to apply the changes.

You can continue with step 2. Use the Update Regions tool in order to apply changes to the
display.

SETTING EFFECT
Type Type of the region. See Regions / Region
types category for instruction how to define
region types.
Title Title format for labeling the region. See
Regions / Title formats category for
instruction how to define region titles.
Name Free text that is used a name for the region.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Regions toolbox > Edit Region Info > 288

SETTING EFFECT
Number Number of the region.
Info Free text that is used as additional
information about the region.
Margin Area added around a region as a placeholder,
for example, for line pattern that need more
space than a simple line. The region is shrunk
by this value in order to avoid overlap
between adjacent regions when using
different line pattern for the display.
Boundaries locked If on, the region is not recomputed when
using the Update Regions after the boundary
line elements were modified.
Hole in If on, the region is defined as a hole. If the
area of the region is completely surrounded
by another area, the option is switched on
automatically. The name of the surrounding
area is displayed next to the Select button.
If the region should not form a hole, click on
the Select button and select Not a hole in the
Select parent region dialog.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Regions toolbox > Move Region Center > 289

Move Region Center

Not Lite, Not UAV

Move Region Center tool moves the center marker of a region to another location. The center
marker may be linked with a text element which has been defined as region title.

To move the region center marker:

1. Select the Move Region Center tool.

2. Move the mouse pointer inside a top view.

The region center closest to the mouse pointer location is highlighted.

3. Identify the region center to be moved with a data click.

4. Define the new location of the center marker with another data click.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Regions toolbox > Regions > 290

Regions
Not Lite, Not UAV

Regions tool opens the Regions window. The window contains a list of regions that are
currently defined in the CAD file. The window’s menu includes commands for creating,
modifying, and deleting regions, and for creating output files of the region list.

TO CHOOSE MENU COMMAND

Create a new region Region / Create
Modify the information for a region Region / Edit information
Move the center point of a region Region / Move center point
Assign a new boundary to a region Region / Assign new boundary
Delete a region Region / Delete
Modify the size of the window View/Small dialog
View/Medium dialog
View/Large dialog
Define fields that are displayed in the list View / Fields
Sort the list of regions View / Sort by
Create output files for the list of regions List / Regions

Region / Create

Create command performs the same action as the Create Region tool.

Region / Edit information

Edit information command performs the same action as the Edit Region Info tool.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Regions toolbox > Regions > 291

Region / Move center point

Move center point command performs the same action as the Move Region Center tool.

Region / Assign new boundary

Assign new boundary command defines a new boundary to a region. The new boundary must
be a closed shape element.

To assign a new boundary to a region:

1. Place the new boundary as shape element.

2. Select the region in the Regions window.

3. Select Assign new boundary command from the Region pulldown menu.

4. Identify the new boundary shape with a data click.

5. Accept the selected boundary.

This assigns the new boundary to the selected region. The boundary type changes to Shape
for this region. Use Update Regions tool in order to see the changes in the CAD file.

Region / Delete

Delete command deletes a region definition. The region definition must be selected in the list
of regions.

To delete a region:
1. Select the region in the Regions window.

2. Select the Delete command from the Region pulldown menu.

The software asks you to confirm the deletion process.

3. Click Yes in the alert dialog.

This deletes the region definition and all related elements.

The Delete command can perform the same action for all regions as the Delete Region tool.

View / Fields

Fields command lets you choose the fields that are displayed in the Regions window. The fields
show the information stored for each region, such as number, name, information, size, type, if
a region forms a hole within another region, title format and boundary status.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Regions toolbox > Regions > 292

If the information for a field is not displayed completely in the list, you may enlarge the
Regions window by using the commands from the View pulldown menu.

View / Sort by

Sort by command sorts the list of regions according to the selected attribute:

· Name - ascending alphabetical order of region names.

· Number - ascending by region number, the smallest number is displayed first in the list.
· Type - ascending alphabetical order of region types.
· Area - descending by region size, the largest region is displayed first in the list.

List / Regions

Regions command provides several options for the output of the list. The output options
include:

· Picture - the list is drawn as MicroStation cell element into the CAD file. The list can include
a color field and/or an area pattern field which illustrate the symbology of the different
regions. (MicroStation only)
· Text file - a simple text file is created where fields are delimited by spaces.
· Table file - a text file is created where fields are delimited by a tab.
The output can either contain each region of the list or summarize regions of the same type.
Depending on the output settings, the list can include information such as type, name, area,
count of regions per type, total area per type, color field, area pattern field.

To create output of the region list:

1. Select the Regions command from the List pulldown menu.
The List regions dialog opens:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Regions toolbox > Regions > 293

2. Define settings and click OK.

3. If Create as is set to Picture, move the mouse pointer inside a top view. Define the location
of the region list by a data click.
OR

4. If Create as is set to Text file or Table file, a standard Windows dialog opens for saving a file.
Define a location on a hard disk in order to store the text file.

SETTING EFFECT
Create as Type of the output:
· Picture - draws the list of regions as a cell
element into the CAD file.
· Text file - saves a space-delimited text file.
· Table file - saves a tab-delimited text file.

Output Defines how regions of the same type are

included in the output:
· Each region - the output includes a line for
each region.
· Region type totals - the output includes a
line for each region type, the areas of
regions of the same type are summarized.
Draw area pattern If on, the list output includes an area pattern
field for each region (type). This is only active
if Create as is set to Picture.
Draw coloring If on, the list output includes a color field for
each region (type). This is only active if Create
as is set to Picture.
Round regions areas before adding If on, the region sizes are rounded before they
are summed up for the total size. This is only
active if Output is set to Region type totals.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Regions toolbox > Update Regions > 294

Update Regions
Not Lite, Not UAV

Update Regions tool redraws the regions in the CAD file. If new region definitions were created
or existing regions were updated, the tool draws all display elements into the CAD file that are
defined for a region. This includes a center marker, a so-called solution shape, and optionally a
color-filled shape, area pattern, and a title.

A region is displayed by the center marker and the solution shape. The additional elements
drawn for a region depend on the region type and are defined in Regions / Region types
category of the TerraModeler Settings. The title format and content are defined in Regions /
Title formats category of the TerraModeler Settings.

The different region elements can be drawn on several CAD file levels which supports their
modification with CAD tools. The levels are defined in Regions / Region levels category of the
TerraModeler Settings.

To redraw regions:
1. Select the Update Regions tool.
The Update Regions dialog opens:

2. Select in the Update list what is updated: All regions or regions in the current View contents
only.

3. Click inside a top view.

The update starts and regions are redrawn.

If a region can not be drawn, an error message is displayed. This can be caused, for example
if region boundaries are not closed or if they are deleted. There are some tolerances related
to gaps in the boundary line network which are defined in Regions / Region design category
of the TerraModeler Settings.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > > 295

Managing Surfaces
TerraModeler supports theoretically an unlimited number of surfaces during the same session.
In practice, the performance of the software and the ability to create, process, and display
surface models depends on the size of the models and the amount of RAM available on the
computer.

The Surfaces tool opens a window that contains a list of surfaces that are currently loaded into
TerraModeler.

The list of loaded surfaces in the Surfaces window shows information about each surface. The
information that can be displayed includes surface attributes, storage information, and status
information. The file Status determines, whether a surface model has been modified (Status =
Modified), saved (Status = Saved) or opened as a reference surface (Status = Reference).

The window’s menu provides commands for managing the surfaces, such as open, save, rename
and close a surface, view surface statistics, modify the triangles of a surface, import and export
data, etc. Further, there are options to derive new surfaces by applying calculations to existing
surface models. The menu also contains commands for opening all toolbars that are part of the
TerraModeler toolbox.

There are three methods included in the Surfaces window that produce surface representation
files in batch processes:

· Produce contours - creates contour CAD files that can store contour lines, labels and ticks.
· Produce lattice models - creates lattice text files that store a gridded DEM of format XYZ.
· Produce triangles - creates triangle CAD files that store the triangle shapes.

The batch processes can include data from several sources, such as point cloud data from
TerraScan projects, survey elements from TerraSurvey or other applications, and breaklines
filtered by breakline rules.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Edit pulldown menu > 296

Edit pulldown menu

Menu commands from Edit pulldown menu in the Surfaces window are used to modify surfaces
and to delete surface files from the hard disk.

TO USE COMMAND
Modify surface information Modify settings
Modify display settings for surfaces in
Profile settings
profiles
Exclude long triangles from a surface Exclude long triangles
Change elevations of a surface by a
Modify elevations
mathematical equation
Remove unnecessary points from a surface Thin
Remove previously deleted points and
Compress
triangles from a surface
Add intermediate points to a surface Add inferred points
Delete a surface file from the hard disk Delete surface

Add inferred points

Add inferred points command inserts points on hill tops and in depressions in a surface model
that is created from contour point types. The added points result in a rounder shape for hill tops
and depressions.

The points are added as points of type inferred points to the surface model. See Point Types for
more information about surface model point types. The surface model can be created, for
example, from contour line elements drawn in the CAD file using the Triangulate View or
Triangulate Elements tools. The element type for inserting the line elements into the surface
must be set to Contour.

To add inferred points to a surface model:

1. (Optional) Select a surface model from the list in the Surfaces window.

2. Select Add inferred points command from the Edit pulldown menu.
This opens the Add Inferred Points dialog:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Edit pulldown menu > Add inferred points 297

3. Select a Surface to which points are added. If a surface was selected in step 1, this surface is
selected in the dialog.

4. Define additional settings and click OK.

This adds the inferred points to the surface model. An information dialog is displayed that
shows the number of added points.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Distance Horizontal spacing between the
highest/lowest closed contour line and
inferred points as well as between the
points.
Dz Vertical distance between the
highest/lowest closed contour line and
inferred points as well as between the
points.

Compress
Compress command deletes previously removed points and triangles from a surface model. It
can also delete excluded triangles from the model. Thus, the tool is used to minimize the
amount of memory for storing the surface model.

To compress a surface model:

1. Select Compress command from the Edit pulldown menu.
This opens the Compress Surface Model dialog:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Edit pulldown menu > Compress 298

2. Select a Surface to compress.

3. Define what triangles are removed: Deleted triangles only or Deleted or excluded triangles.

4. Click OK.
This starts the compression process. When the process is finished, a information dialog
appears that informs about the file size after the compression.

The process is applied to the surface model in the RAM. Therefore, it is still possible to
restore the uncompressed model from the file on the hard disk using the File / Restore from
file command in the Surface window. To save the compressed model, use one of the options
from File / Save surface.

Delete surface
Delete surface command deletes a surface model completely. It removes the surface model
from the RAM and deletes the surface model file from the hard disk.

To delete a surface model completely:

1. Select a surface model in the list of loaded surfaces.

2. Select Delete surface command from the Edit pulldown menu.

3. Confirm the process with Yes in the alert dialog.

This deletes a surface from the memory and the related file on the hard disk.

To remove a surface from RAM but keep the file on the hard disk, use the Close surface
commands of the File pulldown menu.

Exclude long triangles

Exclude long triangles command excludes narrow, long triangles from a surface model. There
can be different exclusion settings for triangles at the outer boundary of a surface model or for
any long triangles.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Edit pulldown menu > Exclude long triangles 299

Excluded triangles are neither displayed nor included in surface-based computation processes.
They can be included again, for example, by using the Exclude Triangle tool or the Exclude Area
tool. To delete excluded triangles completely from a surface model, use Compress command
from the Surfaces window.

To exclude long triangles:

1. (Optional) Select a surface model from the list in the Surfaces window.

2. Select Exclude long triangles command from the Edit pulldown menu.
This opens the Exclude Long Triangles dialog:

3. Select a Surface to exclude triangles from. If a surface was selected in step 1, this surface is
selected in the dialog.

4. Define settings for triangle exclusion.

5. Click OK.
This excludes triangles from the selected surface.

SETTING EFFECT
Exclude outer triangles If on, only triangles along the outer boundary
of the surface model with an edge length
Longer than the given value are excluded.
Exclude any long triangles If on, any triangles of the surface model with
an edge length Longer than the given value
are excluded.

You can use this command several times with different maximum lengths. If the results of
the first exclusion is not satisfying, you can re-run the process with a new maximum length.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Edit pulldown menu > Modify elevations 300

Modify elevations
Modify elevations command changes the elevation values of a surface model by using a
mathematical equation. The process computes a new elevation value for each point of a surface
model.

The old elevation of a point can be used in the equation as variable Z. The equation is actually a
C language expression. You can use any mathematical functions that MDL recognizes. Valid
expressions include functions, such as sin(a), cos(a), tan(a), exp(a), log(a), log10(a), pow(a,b),
sqrt(a), ceil(a), fabs(a), and floor(a), where a and b are floating point values.

To modify elevation values:

1. (Optional) Select a surface model from the list in the Surfaces window.

2. Select Modify elevations command from the Edit pulldown menu.

This opens the Modify Surface Elevations dialog:

3. Select a Surface to modify elevations. If a surface was selected in step 1, this surface is
selected in the dialog.

4. Define the mathematical equation.

5. Click OK.
This starts the calculation of the new elevation values. Depending on the size of the surface
the process may take some time. Use the Update Displays tool or another CAD tool for
updating a view in order to visualize changes in visible surface displays.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
Use fence If on, only points Inside or Outside a fence
are effected.
Z= Mathematical expression that is applied to
surface model points in order to calculated

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Edit pulldown menu > Modify elevations 301

SETTING EFFECT
new elevation values.
Surface Z The button opens the Append surface dialog
which lets you select a surface model. The
elevation values of this surface are then used
in the mathematical expression.

Modify settings
Modify settings command is used to modify the basic information of a surface model, such as
type, name and file for storing the model.

To modify the basic information of a surface:

1. (Optional) Select a surface model from the list in the Surfaces window.

2. Select Modify settings command from the Edit pulldown menu.

This opens the Surface Settings dialog:

3. Select a Surface to modify. If a surface was selected in step 1, this surface is selected in the
dialog.

4. Modify the surface Type, enter a new Name for the surface, and/or assign a new File name
for the surface.

5. Close the dialog.

This saves the new settings to the surface model file. If the File name was modified, a new
copy of the surface model file is created at the same location where the original file is
stored.

Profile settings
Profile settings command opens the Profile surfaces dialog. The dialog contains settings for
drawing surfaces into profiles. See Profile surfaces for a description of the settings in the
dialog.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Edit pulldown menu > Thin 302

Thin
Thin command removes points from a surface model if they are too close to each other. The
allowed minimum distances between points are defined in the tool’s dialog. A point is
removed if it is within both, the minimum horizontal distance and the minimum vertical
distance from the closest adjacent point.

To delete points close to each other:

1. (Optional) Select a surface model from the list in the Surfaces window.

2. Select Thin command from the Edit pulldown menu.

This opens the Thin Surface dialog:

3. Select a Surface to thin. If a surface was selected in step 1, this surface is selected in the
dialog.

4. Define minimum distances.

5. Click OK.
This starts the thinning process. Depending on the size of the surface the process may take
some time.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the effected surface model.
XY distance Minimum horizontal distance between two
points.
Z distance Minimum vertical distance between two
points.

Removed points and triangles remain as inactive data in a surface model. Use the Compress
command in order to delete the inactive data completely from a surface model.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > File pulldown menu > 303

File pulldown menu

Menu commands from File pulldown menu in the Surfaces window are used to open, save,
close, and restore surfaces.

TO USE COMMAND
Create a new surface file New surface
Open a surface file stored on a hard disk Open surface
Close a surface file Close surface
Close all surfaces Close all
Save a surface file on a hard disk Save surface
Save a surface to a new file on a hard disk Save as
Save all surface files on a hard disk Save all
Open a reference surface Open reference
Import surface files Import
Export to surface files Export
Restore a surface after modifications Restore from file
Open the TerraModeler Settings dialog User settings
Unload TerraModeler Exit

Close surface
Close surface command removes a surface model from the list of loaded surfaces. It does not
delete the surface model file from the hard disk.

You can close surface models using one of the two options in the File menu of the Surfaces
window:

· Close surface - close a single surface model.

· Close all - close all surface models that are loaded in TerraModeler. If one of the surface
models has been modified, you need to confirm whether you want to save the changes to
the surface model file or not.

To close a single surface model:

1. Select a surface model in the list of loaded surfaces.

2. Select Close surface command from the File pulldown menu.

The Close Surface dialog opens:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > File pulldown menu > Close surface 304

3. Select the Surface to be closed.

4. Click OK.
This removes the selected surface model from the list of loaded surfaces. If the surface has
been modified, you need to confirm whether you want to save the changes to the surface
model file or not.

To remove the surface model from RAM and delete the file on the hard disk, use the Delete
surface command from the Edit pulldown menu.

Exit
Exit command closes TerraModeler, it unloads the application.

If there are modified and unsaved surface models, the software asks you if you want to save
changes to the surface model files. Confirm with Yes if you want to save the changes or with No
if you want to close the application without saving changes to surface model files.

Export
Export commands can be used for exporting surface data into files of different formats. This is
described in detail in Chapter Importing and Exporting Data.

Import
Import commands can be used for importing surface data from files of different formats. This is
described in detail in Chapter Importing and Exporting Data.

New surface
New surface command creates a new empty surface model. The command adds the new
surface to the list. Optionally, the model can be saved to the hard disk automatically after it is
created. This is defined in Saving surfaces category of the TerraModeler Settings.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > File pulldown menu > New surface 305

To create a new surface:

1. Select New surface command from the File menu.
This opens the Surface Settings dialog:

2. Select a surface Type.

3. Enter a Name for the surface.

4. (Optional) Rename the File for storing the model on the hard disk.

5. Click OK.
A new empty surface is added to the list in the Surfaces window. You can continue with
adding elements to the surface by using tools from the TerraModeler Create Surfaces
toolbox.

Open reference
Open reference command opens a surface model file for read-only access. A reference surface
can be viewed and displayed using display options for surfaces, and it can be included in
calculation processes. A reference surface can not by modified.

To open a reference surface:

1. Select Open reference command from the File pulldown menu.
The Open reference surface dialog box opens, a standard dialog for opening files.

2. Locate and select the file to be opened.

3. Click OK.
This reads in the surface model file and adds it to the list of loaded surfaces. You can use the
reference surface in all tools which do not modify a surface.

When a reference surface is opened, the application reads a copy of the model in the RAM
memory. It uses this copy during the session and does not detect if somebody else makes
changes to the original surface model file.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > File pulldown menu > Open surface 306

Open surface
TerraModeler surface models are stored in binary files. Open surface command opens a
previously stored surface model file from a hard disk.

To open a surface file:

1. Select Open command from the File pulldown menu.

2. The Open surface dialog opens, a standard dialog for opening files.
Locate and select the surface file to be opened.

3. Click OK.
This reads in the surface model file and adds it to the list of loaded surfaces.

Restore from file

Restore from file command reloads the surface model file from the hard disk. This can be used
after modifying a surface in order to restore the previously saved situation, for example if it
turns out that the modifications were a mistake.

The restore process can only be done for surfaces that have a status "Modified" which means
that the surface model in the RAM memory has been changed but not yet saved to the hard
disk. Once the status is "Saved", all modifications are written to the file on the hard disk and
the restore process would not change anything to the surface model.

To restore a surface model from a file:

1. Select Restore from file command from the File pulldown menu.
This opens the Restore Surface From File dialog:

2. Select a Surface to restore.

3. Click OK.
The surface file is reloaded from the file displayed as File name in the Restore Surface From
File dialog.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > File pulldown menu > Restore from file 307

The list of surfaces in the Restore Surface From File dialog contains only surfaces that can be
reloaded from file. If there is no such surface available, a dialog is displayed with the
information that none of the surface models can be restored.

Save surface
TerraModeler keeps surface models in the RAM memory of the computer. Modifications to the
surface model effect only the copy in memory until the model is saved to the hard disk.

TerraModeler surface models are saved as binary files. When a new surface model is created,
the application assigns a default file name by combining the CAD file name with an extension
such as T00, T01, T02, etc. You can change the file name and store it on any hard disk or other
storage device. See Chapter TIN File Format Specification for more information about the
surface model file format.

You can save surface models to files using one of the three options in the File menu of the
Surfaces window:

· Save surface - save a surface model to the file that is assigned to this model.
· Save as - save a new copy of a surface model file.
· Save all - save all modified surface models to the files that are assigned to the models.

To save a single surface model:

1. Select the Save surface command from the File pulldown menu.
The Save Surface dialog opens:

2. Select a Surface to save.

3. Click OK.
The surface is saved to the file displayed as File name in the Save Surface dialog.

To save a new copy of a surface model file:

1. Select the Save As command from the File pulldown menu.
The Save Surface As dialog opens:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > File pulldown menu > Save surface 308

2. Select a Surface to save.

3. Define a location and file name in the As file field. The Browse button lets you select a
location on the PC for storing the file.

4. Click OK.
The surface is saved to the given file.

TerraModeler surface models can be saved automatically when the CAD file is saved or after
a model is created. This is defined in Saving surfaces category of the TerraModeler Settings.

User settings
User settings command opens the TerraModeler Settings window. It performs the same action
as the Settings tool in TerraModeler General toolbox.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Help pulldown menu > 309

Help pulldown menu

Menu commands from Help pulldown menu in Surfaces window are used to open the online
User Guide and to display license information for TerraModeler.

TO USE COMMAND
Open the TerraModeler User Guide Contents
Display the License information dialog About TerraModeler

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Tools pulldown menu > 310

Tools pulldown menu

Menu commands from Tools pulldown menu in Surfaces window can be used to open toolbars
of TerraModeler. The toolbars are the same as in the TerraModeler toolbox.

TO USE COMMAND
Open the TerraModeler toolbox Main
Open the General toolbox General
Open the Create Surfaces toolbox Create Surfaces
Open the Draw using Surface toolbox Draw using Surface
Open the Drawing Utilities toolbox Drawing Utilities
Open the Edit Point toolbox Edit Point
Open the Edit Area toolbox Edit Area
Open the Display Surface toolbox Display Surface
Open the Display Regions toolbox Display Regions Not Lite
Open the Profiles toolbox Profiles
Open the Quantity toolbox Quantity
Open the Domains toolbox Domains Not Lite, Not UAV
Open the Display Single toolbox Display Single Not Lite
Open the Regions toolbox Regions Not Lite, Not UAV
Open the 2D Contours toolbox 2D Contours

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > 311

Utility pulldown menu

Menu commands from Utility pulldown menu in the Surfaces window are used to create
derived surface models from existing surfaces, to validate the elevation accuracy of a surface
model, and to produce output files in batch mode.

TO USE COMMAND
View surface statistics View statistics
Create a copy of a surface Copy surface
Create a combined surface from two surfaces Merge surfaces
Subtract elevations of two surfaces Subtract surfaces
Create a statistical grid surface model Statistical model
Check surface model elevations against
Output control report
ground control points
Create contour lines in batch mode Produce contours Not Lite, Not UAV
Create lattice files in batch mode Produce lattice models Not Lite, Not UAV
Create triangles in batch mode Produce triangles Not Lite, Not UAV
Work with lattice databases Lattice database Not Lite, Not UAV

Copy surface
Copy surface command creates an identical copy of a surface model. The copy is created for the
surface model in the RAM and for the surface model file stored on a hard disk. The new surface
model file is saved at the same location where the original surface model is stored.

To create a copy of a surface model:

1. (Optional) Select a surface model from the list in the Surfaces window.

2. Select Copy surface command from the Utility pulldown menu.

This opens the Copy Surface dialog:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Copy surface 312

3. Select a Surface to copy from. If a surface was selected in step 1, this surface is selected in the
dialog.

4. Click Copy.
This opens the Surface Settings dialog:

5. Select a Type for the new surface.

6. Define a Name for the surface.

7. (Optional) Define a new File name for the surface model file stored on the hard disk.

8. Click OK.
This creates a copy of the surface model.

Lattice database
Not Lite, Not UAV

Lattice database commands can be used for working with lattice databases, a collection of grid
files stored in the same directory. This is described in detail in Chapter Lattice Database.

Merge surfaces
Merge surfaces command combines two surfaces. It creates a new surface model in the RAM
and as surface model file on a hard disk. The new surface model file is saved at the same
location where the original surface models are stored.

The command can be used, for example, to create a surface representing a new ground level by
combining a design surface and an existing ground surface. The design surface, such as an
excavation or a road, is set to be the primary surface. The merging operation copies all the
information from the primary surface to the new surface. The secondary surface, existing
ground, enlarges the area of the new surface. The points from the secondary surface are only
used if they are located outside the primary surface.

To merge two surface models:

1. Select Merge surfaces command from the Utility pulldown menu.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Merge surfaces 313

This opens the Merge Surfaces dialog:

2. Select Primary and Secondary surfaces to merge.

3. Select a surface that is used in areas where the two surfaces overlap.

4. Click OK.

SETTING EFFECT
Primary All the information from the primary surface is
copied to the new surface.
Secondary Information from the secondary surface is
used only outside the primary surface.
Use Defines which surface to use in places where
the surfaces overlap:
· Primary surface - use the primary surface.
· Highest surface - use the higher of the two
surfaces.
· Lowest surface - use the lower of the two
surfaces.

This opens the Surface Settings dialog:

5. Select a Type for the combined surface.

6. Define a Name for the surface.

7. (Optional) Define a new File name for the surface model file stored on the hard disk.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Merge surfaces 314

8. Click OK.
This creates a combined surface model.

Output control report

Output control report command creates a report of elevation differences between a surface
model and control points. This can be used to check the elevation accuracy of the surface model
and to calculate a correction value for improving the elevation accuracy of the model.

The control points have to be stored in a space delimited text file in which each row has four
fields: identifier, easting, northing, and elevation. The identifier field is normally a number but
it may include non-numeric characters as well.

To create a control report:

1. Select Output control report command from the Utility pulldown menu.
This opens the Output Control Report dialog:

2. Select the text file that stores the control points.

3. Define settings and click OK.

This calculates the elevation differences and opens the Control report window.

SETTING EFFECT
Known points Name and location of the file that stores the
coordinates of the control points.
Surface Surface model used for comparison with the
control points.
Max slope Maximum terrain slope for which an
elevation difference is computed.
Z tolerance Elevation variation in the surface model
points. This value is used only when

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Output control report 315

SETTING EFFECT
computing the terrain slope so that small
triangles do not exceed the Max slope value.

Control report

The Control report window shows the coordinates of the control points, the surface elevation
values at control point locations and the elevation difference at control point locations. Below
the list of control points, the statistical values for the control report are displayed.

The report can be saved or printed directly by using the Save as text or Print command from the
File pulldown menu. Outliers in Dz can be highlighted using the Settings command from the
File menu. The command opens the Control report settings dialog where a limit for highlighting
Dz values related to the standard deviation can be defined.

The report can be sorted by deviation, Dz, magnitude, number (identifier), easting or northing
coordinates using the corresponding commands from the Sort pulldown menu.

The Use field in the report determines whether a control point is used in the report or not. You
can exclude a control point from the report by clicking in the square of the respective control
point.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Output control report 316

The Show location button can be used to identify the location of a control point in a CAD file
view. Click the button and move the mouse pointer into a view in order to show the control
point location. A data click centers the view at the control point location.

The Identify button can be used to select a specific control point in the report. Click the button
and move the mouse pointer inside a CAD file view. The control point closest to the mouse
pointer is dynamically highlighted. A data click selects the control point in the report.

The Average dz value displayed on the lower right side of the report window can be used to
apply a linear transformation to the surface model. The value indicates whether a surface is
systematically too high or too low compared with the control points. Thus, transforming the
elevation of the surface model using this value with inverse sign results in a better match
between surface model and control points. You can use, for example, the Modify elevations
command in the Surfaces window to apply the elevation correction to the surface model.

Produce contours
Not Lite, Not UAV

Produce contours command creates contours in an automated process. This is useful for contour
production on project level, when contours have to be created for a large area.

The automatic contour production does not rely on surface models loaded in TerraModeler. The
ground model can be defined by:

· Laser points in a TerraScan project - usually contour keypoints (for rather smooth,
cartographic contours) or model keypoints (for accurate, mathematical contours) in separate
files referenced by a TerraScan project.
· Feature coded breakline elements - in reference CAD files, vector elements created with
TerraSurvey or any other application enabled in Triangulate Survey category in the
TerraModeler Settings. References are applicable in MicroStation only.
· Breakline elements - in reference CAD files, vector elements properly organized by level
and symbology or breaklines filtered by rules using the Triangulate Elements tool. References
are applicable in MicroStation only.

The settings for contour lines, labels, ticks, and peaks and pits labels are stored in text files
which are then used by the batch process.

The automatic process writes the contours into multiple CAD files. A seed file is used as starting
point for creating the contour CAD files.

Workflow for automatic contour production:

1. Prepare the laser data in TerraScan. Normally, this includes the classification of
model/contour keypoints into separate files. Create a TerraScan project that references the
keypoint files.

2. If required, create breakline vector elements using CAD and TerraScan tools.

3. Define and save a contour settings file using the Display Contours tool.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Produce contours 317

Use Write to file as Mode. Contours should be drawn preferable as Soft line strings. The
contour settings file stores settings from Display Contours tool, Contour options, Contour
label options, and Contour tick options.

4. (Optional) Define and save a settings file for peaks and pits using the Label Peaks and Pits
tool.

5. Create a seed file for storing the contour lines.

The seed file is usually an empty 3D CAD file possibly with a reference file attached. The
reference file contains the breaklines that are included in the contour line computation.
Alternatively, the breaklines can be stored in the seed file directly.
Reference files are only available in MicroStation.

6. If breakline vectors are used, create filtering rules for breaklines using the Triangulate
Elements tool.

7. Create shapes that divide the project area into smaller parts.
Each shape results in a separate CAD file for contours. The shape boundary is used by the
software as fence in order to clip the contour lines to the shape dimensions.

8. (Optional) Place text elements inside the shapes.

The texts are used for naming the contour CAD files. If no texts are selected, the files are
named by automatic numbering.

9. Select the shapes and (optional) the texts.

10. Select Produce contours command from the Utility pulldown menu in TerraModeler
Surfaces window.
This opens the Produce contours dialog:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Produce contours 318

11. Define settings and click OK.

This opens the Triangulate surface dialog. Follow the common steps for Creating a surface
model.
The software starts the contour line production. First, it closes the original CAD file from
which the process was started. Next, it opens the seed file, computes the contours for the
first shape, writes them into the CAD file, and closes the CAD file. Then the process
continues with the next shape. After all contour CAD files are created, the original CAD file is
opened again.

SETTING EFFECT
Model buffer Area around each shape for which the surface
model is created in addition to the area of
the active shape itself. The buffer should be
big enough to ensure smooth contour line
transitions on shape boundaries.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Produce contours 319

SETTING EFFECT
Save each model If on, a surface model file is saved for each
shape.
Draw contours If on, contours are drawn in the CAD files.
The given Settings are used for contour
computation and display.
Label peaks and pits If on, labels for peaks and pits are drawn in
the CAD file. The given Settings are used for
label display.
Seed file Location of the CAD file that serves as seed
file for contour line production.
Directory Location on a hard disk where the contour
CAD files are stored.
Name prefix Text string that is added at the beginning of
the file name of contour CAD files.
If text elements are selected for each shape,
the contour CAD file names are a
combination of the prefix and the selected
text element. If no text elements are
selected, the contour CAD files are named
with the prefix and an automatically
increasing number.
Laser points If on, laser points from the given Project and
Classes are used for surface model creation.
Survey elements If on, feature coded elements created by
TerraSurvey or any other application enabled
in Triangulate Survey category in the
TerraModeler Settings are used for surface
model creation.
Vector elements If on, vector elements filtered as breaklines
according to the given Rule file are used for
surface model creation.

Produce lattice models

Not Lite, Not UAV

Produce lattice models command creates lattice model files in an automated process. This is
useful for lattice model production on project level, when lattice model files have to be
created for a large area.

Lattice models are representations of a surface using a grid structure of points. The lattice
model files include regularly distributed points at constant intervals in both, X and Y directions.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Produce lattice models 320

Common storage formats are text files, image files, or program-specific grid file formats. The
automatic process writes the lattice model points into multiple output files of a defined
format.

The automatic lattice model production does not rely on surface models loaded in
TerraModeler. It is more closely connected with point cloud processing functionality in
TerraScan. The source data for the lattice model can be defined by:

· Laser points in a TerraScan project - usually ground points referenced by a TerraScan project.
· Feature coded breakline elements - in reference CAD files, vector elements created with
TerraSurvey or any other application enabled in Triangulate Survey category in the
TerraModeler Settings. References are applicable in MicroStation only.
· Breakline elements - in reference CAD files, vector elements properly organized by level
and symbology or breaklines filtered by rules using the Triangulate Elements tool. References
are applicable in MicroStation only.

To create a lattice model file from a surface model, see Export / Lattice file command.

Workflow for automatic lattice model production:

1. Prepare the laser data in TerraScan. Normally, this includes the classification of ground
points. Create a TerraScan project that references the laser point files.

2. If required, create breakline vector elements using CAD and TerraScan tools.

3. If breakline vectors are used, create filtering rules for breaklines using the Triangulate
Elements tool.

4. Create shapes that divide the project area into smaller parts.
Each shape results in a separate lattice model file. The shape boundary is used by the
software as fence in order to clip the lattice model to the shape dimensions.

5. (Optional) Place text elements inside the shapes.

The texts are used for naming the lattice model files. If no texts are selected, the files are
named by automatic numbering.

6. Select the shapes and (optional) the texts.

7. Select Produce lattice models command from the Utility pulldown menu in TerraModeler
Surfaces window.
This opens the Produce lattice models dialog:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Produce lattice models 321

8. Define settings and click OK.

The software starts the lattice model production. It computes the lattice model for the first
shape and writes it into the output file. Then the process continues with the next shape until
all lattice models are created.

SETTING EFFECT
Model buffer Area around each shape for which the surface
model is created in addition to the area of the
active shape itself. The buffer should be big
enough to ensure smooth transitions between
lattice models on shape boundaries.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Produce lattice models 322

SETTING EFFECT
Save each model If on, a surface model file is saved for each
shape.
Laser points If on, laser points from the given Project and
Classes are used as data source.
Survey elements If on, feature coded elements created by
TerraSurvey or any other application enabled
in Triangulate Survey category in the
TerraModeler Settings are used as data
source.
Vector elements If on, vector elements filtered as breaklines
according to the given Rule file are used as
data source.
Grid spacing Constant distance between points in the grid
structure of the lattice model files.
File format Format of the output files. Available formats
are:
· ArcInfo Grid, Intergraph GRD
· GeoTIFF formats, Shaded GeoTIFF
· Japanese DMF and LEM
· Raw image formats
· Surfer ASCII and binary
· XYZ text
Many of the additional settings for the lattice
files depend on the selected format for the
output files.
Values at Defines the exact location of the lattice point
coordinates:
· Cell center - the coordinates of the grid cell
center are stored.
· Cell corner - the coordinates of the grid cell
corner are stored.
For some output file formats only one option
is available.
Outside Z Defines a constant value for grid cells outside
the lattice model area where no elevation
value can be derived from the source data.
This can be, for example, a software-specific
value.
Z unit Defines the elevation value unit for several
raster formats.
Create TFW files If on, external georeferencing files are
created for GeoTIFFs .

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Produce lattice models 323

SETTING EFFECT
Write coordinate block If on, a coordinate block file is written for
Intergraph GRD files.
Byte order Defines the byte order for Raw integer image
formats related to the processor type: Intel or
Motorola.
Range Determines how the color scheme is fitted to
the elevation values for Shaded GeoTIFF files:
· Uniform - the range should include all
elevation values of the area for which
GeoTIFFs are produced in order to ensure
seamless coloring over all images.
· Fit to tile - the colors are fitted to elevation
values of each tile individually.
Sun azimuth Direction of the light for Shaded GeoTIFFs.
The direction from the north is defined with
zero and angle values increase clockwise.
Sun angle Height of the light source above the horizon.
Color scheme Color scheme to use for Shaded GeoTIFFs:
· Default - default color scheme containing
magenta, red, yellow, green, cyan, blue, and
purple.
· Selected colors - use Define button to
create a customized color scheme. Define a
customized color scheme for more
information.
Color cycles Number of color cycles used for Shaded
GeoTIFFs. Use zero to create a gray scale
display showing triangle slope only.
Outside points Defines for Xyz text files how to handle grid
points outside the lattice model area where
no elevation value can be derived from the
source data:
· Skip - outside grid points are not written
into the text file.
· Output - outside grid points are written into
the text file using the constant value given
in the Outside Z field.
Directory Location on a hard disk where the lattice
model files are stored.
Name prefix Text string that is added at the beginning of
the file name of lattice model files.
If text elements are selected for each shape,
the lattice model file names are a

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Produce lattice models 324

SETTING EFFECT
combination of the prefix and the selected
text element. If no text elements are
selected, the lattice model files are named
with the prefix and an automatically
increasing number.
Extension Extension for the lattice model files. It is
recommended to use the standard extensions
for specific file formats, for example, .TIF for
GeoTIFFs, .GRD for ArcInfo Grids, .TXT, .XYZ or
.ASC for text files.

Produce lattice models command can be used to create GeoTIFFs of shaded surface model
representations in a batch process. Select Shaded GeoTIFF as File format and respective
settings for elevation range, sun azimuth, sun angle, and color scheme. The output result is
similar to the display created by the Display Shaded Surface tool.

Produce triangles
Not Lite, Not UAV

Produce triangles command creates triangles in an automated process. This is useful for triangle
CAD file production on project level, when triangles have to be drawn for a large area.

The automatic triangle production does not rely on surface models loaded in TerraModeler. The
ground model can be defined by:

· Laser points in a TerraScan project - usually ground point or model keypoints referenced by a
TerraScan project.
· Feature coded breakline elements - in reference CAD files, vector elements created with
TerraSurvey or any other application enabled in Triangulate Survey category in the
TerraModeler Settings. References are applicable in MicroStation only.
· Breakline elements - in reference CAD files, vector elements properly organized by level
and symbology or breaklines filtered by rules using the Triangulate Elements tool. References
are applicable in MicroStation only.

The automatic process writes the triangles as shape elements into multiple CAD files. A seed
file is used as starting point for creating the triangle CAD files.

To produce triangle CAD files automatically in a batch process:

1. Prepare the laser data in TerraScan. Normally, this includes the classification of ground or
model keypoints. Create a TerraScan project that references the laser point files.

2. If required, create breakline vector elements using CAD and TerraScan tools.

3. Create a seed file for storing the triangles.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Produce triangles 325

The seed file is usually an empty 3D CAD file possibly with a reference file attached. The
reference file contains the breaklines that are included in the triangle computation.
Alternatively, the breaklines can be stored in the seed file directly.
Reference files are available in MicroStation only.

4. If breakline vectors are used, create filtering rules for breaklines using the Triangulate
Elements tool.

5. Create shapes that divide the project area into smaller parts.
Each shape results in a separate CAD file for triangles. The shape boundary is used by the
software as fence in order to decide whether triangles are inside or outside the shape and to
clip the triangles to the shape dimensions.

6. (Optional) Place text elements inside the shapes.

The texts are used for naming the triangle CAD files. If no texts are selected, the files are
named by automatic numbering.

7. Select the shapes and (optional) the texts.

8. Select Produce triangles command from the Utility pulldown menu in TerraModeler Surfaces
window.
This opens the Produce Triangles dialog:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Produce triangles 326

9. Define settings and click OK.

This opens the Triangulate surface dialog. Follow the common steps for Creating a surface
model.
The software starts the triangle production. First, it closes the original CAD file from which
the process was started. Next, it opens the seed file, computes the triangles for the first
shape, writes them into the CAD file, and closes the CAD file. Then the process continues
with the next shape. After all triangle CAD file are created, the original CAD file is opened
again.

SETTING EFFECT
Model buffer Area around each shape for which the surface
model is created in addition to the area of the
active shape itself. The buffer should be big
enough to ensure smooth contour line
transitions on shape boundaries.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Produce triangles 327

SETTING EFFECT
Save each model If on, a surface model file is saved for each
shape.
Draw triangles Defines how triangles are drawn on tile
boundaries:
· All - all triangles are drawn.
· Center inside tile - triangles are drawn
completely if the center point is inside the
tile.
· Clipped to tile boundary - triangles are
clipped to the tile boundaries. This results
in rectangles along tile boundaries.
Color by Defines the coloring mode:
· Elevation - Uniform - triangles are colored
by elevation value. The colors are fitted to
the given Range of elevation values.
· Elevation - Fit to tile - triangles are colored
by elevation value. The colors are fitted to
elevation values of each tile individually.
· Slope - triangles are colored by slope
gradient.
Range Elevation range for all triangle CAD files. The
range should include all elevation values of
the area for which triangles are produced in
order to ensure seamless coloring over all
triangle CAD files. This is only active if Color
by is set to Elevation - Uniform.
Level Level on which the triangles are drawn into
the CAD file.
Colors Opens the Color scheme dialog for the
definition of a color scheme for triangle
coloring. Creating a color scheme of discrete
colors for more information.
Color list Opens the MicroStation color table for single
color selection.
Seed file Location of the CAD file that serves as seed
file for triangle production.
Directory Location on a hard disk where the triangle CAD
files are stored.
Name prefix Text string that is added at the beginning of
the file name of triangle CAD files.
If text elements are selected for each shape,
the triangle CAD file names are a combination
of the prefix and the selected text element. If

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Produce triangles 328

SETTING EFFECT
no text elements are selected, the triangle
CAD files are named with the prefix and an
automatically increasing number.
Laser points If on, laser points from the given Project and
Classes are used as data source.
Survey elements If on, feature coded elements created by
TerraSurvey or any other application enabled
in Triangulate Survey category in the
TerraModeler Settings are used as data
source.
Vector elements If on, vector elements filtered as breaklines
according to the given Rule file are used as
data source.

Statistical model
Statistical model command calculates statistical values based on an existing surface model. It
creates a new grid model in the RAM and as surface model file on a hard disk. The new grid
model file is saved at the same location where the original surface model is stored.

The new surface is a grid type surface. It contains evenly-spaced points at constant intervals in
both, X and Y directions. The statistical values are mathematically derived from the existing
surface within a circular or squared calculation area. When calculating a value for a grid point,
the application searches for points in the existing model within a given radius from the grid
point location. The values in the grid model can represent the number of points; the average,
sum, or gravitational sum of elevation values; the minimum or maximum elevation values.

To create a statistical grid model:

1. Select Statistical model command from the Utility pulldown menu.
This opens the Create Balanced Grid Model dialog:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Statistical model 329

2. Define settings and click OK.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Surface to create.
From Existing surface from which to calculate
values.
Expand to rectangle If on, the grid surface is expanded to a
rectangular area that encloses the original
surface completely.
Fence contents If on, use only points from the original surface
that are inside a fence. (MicroStation only)
X step Interval in X direction between points in the
grid model.
Y step Interval in Y direction between points in the
grid model.
Enter origin If on, you can enter the origin of the new grid
model with a data click. If the data click is
located inside the model area, a grid point of
the model is placed at the location of the
mouse click.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Statistical model 330

SETTING EFFECT
From area Shape of the calculation area around a grid
point:
· Circle - circle with a given Radius.
· Square - square with Radius value equal to
half the side length.
Radius Determines the size of the calculation area
around a grid point.
Unit radius Radius at which points get a weight factor of 1
when computing the gravitational sum of
points.
New Z Mathematical expression to calculate for each
grid point inside the calculation area. This may
include variables:
· Count - the number of points.
· Average - the average of elevation values.
· Sum - the sum of elevation values.
· Gravsum - the gravitational sum of
elevation values.
· Minimum - smallest elevation value.
· Maximum - highest elevation value.

Empty cells Determines how cells without a calculated

value are handled in the grid model:
· Assign value - a constant value is assigned.
· Skip - empty cells are skipped in the model.

Empty value Constant value that is assigned to cells

without a calculated value in the grid model.
This is only active if Empty cells is set to Assign
value.

This opens the Surface Settings dialog:

3. Select a Type for the new surface.

4. Define a Name for the grid model.

5. (Optional) Define a new File name for the surface model file stored on the hard disk.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > Statistical model 331

6. Click OK.
This creates a grid model that represents the derived statistical values of the original surface
model.

Subtract surfaces
Subtract surfaces command calculates the elevation difference of all surface points between
two existing surface models. It creates a new surface model in the RAM but does not save the
surface model file on a hard disk. Use an option from Save surface command in order to save
the new surface model.

To subtract two surface models:

1. Select Subtract surfaces command from the Utility pulldown menu.
This opens the Subtract surfaces dialog:

2. Select Upper surface and Lower surface to be subtracted.

3. Click OK.
This opens the Surface Settings dialog:

4. Select a Type for the new surface.

5. Define a Name for the surface.

6. (Optional) Define a new File name for the surface model file stored on the hard disk.

7. Click OK.
This creates a surface model that represents the elevation differences between the two
original surface models.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > Utility pulldown menu > View statistics 332

View statistics
View statistics command shows statistical information for a selected surface model. This
includes the numbers of points and triangles, and the coordinate ranges for easting, northing,
and elevation.

To view surface statistics:

1. (Optional) Select a surface model from the list in the Surfaces window.

2. Select View statistics command from the Utility pulldown menu.

This opens the Surface Statistics dialog:

3. Select a Surface to view statistics. If a surface was selected in step 1, this surface is selected
in the dialog.
This displays the statistics for the selected surface model.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > View pulldown menu > 333

View pulldown menu

Menu commands from View pulldown menu in Surfaces window are used to change the
appearance of the Surfaces window.

TO USE COMMAND
Display a minimized Surface window Minimal dialog
Display a small size Surfaces window Small dialog
Display a medium size Surfaces window Medium dialog
Display a large size Surfaces window Large dialog
Change the display of fields in the Surfaces Fields
window
Sort the list of surfaces in the Surfaces Sort by
window

Fields
Fields command lets you select which information columns are displayed in the Surface
window.

To select visible fields:

1. Select Fields command from the View pulldown menu.
This opens the View Surface Fields dialog:

2. Switch on fields that you want to display in the Surface window and click OK.

Sort by
Sort by command sorts the list of loaded surface models according to the selected attribute.
The sub-menu includes the following options:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Managing Surfaces > View pulldown menu > Sort by 334

· Internal ID - sorts increasing by the internal number of the surface model.

· Name - sorts alphabetically increasing by the name of the surface model.
· Type - sorts alphabetically increasing by the type of the surface model.
· File name - sorts alphabetically increasing by the file name of the surface model.
· Point count - sorts decreasing by the amount of points contained in the surface models.

The order of surface models in the list determines the drawing order of the models in the CAD
file. Models that appear first in the list are drawn before models that appear further down in
the list. Depending on the display method, this may result in only the last model in the list
being visible in top views if surface models overlap.

To sort surface models:

1. Select an option from Sort by command from the View pulldown menu.
This sort the surface model list according to the selected attribute.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > > 335

Importing and Exporting Data

TerraModeler can import data from a variety of sources and output data to several file formats.
Most of the import and export functions can be found in the File pulldown menu of the
Surfaces window.

FOR DATA TYPE USE FOR IMPORT USE FOR EXPORT

Xyz text file Import / XYZ text file Export / Xyz text file
Xyz binary file (LAS, BIN, FBI) Import / XYZ binary file -
Disimp grid file Import / Lattice file Not Lite Export / Lattice file Not Lite
Intergraph grid file (GRD) Import / Lattice file Not Lite Export / Lattice file Not Lite
Ordnance Survey NTF grid file Import / Lattice file Not Lite -
Triangles in CAD file Import / Triangles Display Triangles tool
Triangle text file - Export / Triangle text file
InfraModel 4.0 file Import / InfraModel file Export / Triangle text file
LandXML 1.0/1.2 file Import / LandXML file Export / Triangle text file
ArcInfo grid file (GRD) - Export / Lattice file Not Lite
GeoTIFF grid file - Export / Lattice file Not Lite
Japanese grid file - Export / Lattice file Not Lite
Raw binary grid file - Export / Lattice file Not Lite
Surfer grid file - Export / Lattice file Not Lite
Xyz text grid file Import / XYZ text file Export / Lattice file Not Lite
Elevation-colored raster - Export / Raster image Not Lite
image
Graphical elements Triangulate Elements tool Export / Graphical elements
SiteWorks surface model Open surface -

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Export / Graphical elements > 336

Export / Graphical elements

Graphical elements command draws different types of surface model points and lines on given
levels into the CAD file. Random and inferred points can be drawn as leveling text elements, as
zero length lines (points), or as X character text elements. Breaklines, contours, hole
boundaries, and outer boundaries are drawn as linear elements.

The text design of the leveling text elements for random and inferred points are defined in
Elevation labels category of the TerraModeler Settings.

To draw surface model elements into the CAD file

1. Select Graphical elements command from the File / Export pulldown menu.
This opens the Export Graphical Elements dialog:

2. Select a Surface model for which to draw elements into the CAD file.

3. Select the surface element to be drawn and define Level and Color settings.

4. Define the element type for drawing random and inferred points.

5. Click OK.
This draws the selected elements into the CAD file.

The command may be useful if you want to modify the surface in a way TerraModeler does not
provide any suitable tools for. For example, TerraModeler does not include a tool for shifting a
group of surface model elements horizontally. You can accomplish this by:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Export / Graphical elements > 337

1. Export the surface model elements as graphical elements into the CAD file.

2. Switch off all other levels in a view.

3. Move the graphical elements using CAD tools.

4. Delete the old surface model.

5. Use Triangulate View tool to create a new surface model from the shifted graphical
elements.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Export / Lattice file > 338

Export / Lattice file

Not Lite

Lattice file command creates a lattice model file from a surface model. Lattice models are
representations of a surface using a grid structure of points. The lattice model files include
regularly distributed points at constant intervals in both, X and Y directions. Common storage
formats are text files, image files, or software-specific grid file formats.

The command can create lattice files for multiple selected rectangles in a batch process. This
requires rectangles drawn in the CAD file that define the lattice file boundaries. In order to
automate the file naming for the output files as well, a text element can be placed inside the
rectangles. Both, the rectangles and the text elements must be selected in order to use them in
the export process.

To create lattice model file(s) from a surface model:

1. (Optional) Draw and select rectangle(s) and text element(s) for defining the area of the
output file(s).

2. Select Lattice file command from the File / Export pulldown menu.
This opens the Export Lattice File dialog:

3. Define settings and click OK.

4. If the area of the output file is not selected in step 1, define the export area by drawing a
rectangle with two data clicks in a top view.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Export / Lattice file > 339

5. If the output file names are not defined by selected text elements, the Export grid file dialog
opens, a standard dialog for saving file.

6. Enter a name including the file extension for the output file and click OK.
The lattice file is created.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Surface model for which to create the lattice
file.
Export Area covered by the output file:
· Whole surface - the complete surface
model is exported.
· Rectangle - the surface model area for
export is defined by a orthonormal
rectangle.
· Rotated rectangle - the surface model area
for export is defined by a rotated rectangle.
This is only active if File format is set to
Intergraph GRD.
· Selected rectangle(s) - the area defined by
selected rectangle(s) is exported. This is
only active if at least one rectangular shape
is selected.
Grid size Constant distance between points in the grid
structure of the lattice model file.
Exclude outside fence If on, the surface points outside a selected
polygon or fence are treated as outside
points.
File format Format of the output file. Available formats
are:
· ArcInfo Grid, Intergraph GRD
· Disimap raster format
· GeoTIFF formats, Shaded GeoTIFF
· Japanese DMF and LEM
· Raw image formats
· Surfer ASCII and binary
· XYZ text
Many of the additional settings for the lattice
files depend on the selected format for the
output files.
Values at Defines the exact location of the lattice point
coordinates:
· Cell center - the coordinates of the grid cell
center are stored.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Export / Lattice file > 340

SETTING EFFECT

· Cell corner - the coordinates of the grid cell

corner are stored.
For some output file formats only one option
is available.
No data value Defines a constant value for grid cells inside
the lattice model area where no elevation
value can be derived from the source data.
This can be, for example, a software-specific
value.
Z unit Defines the elevation value unit for several
raster formats.
Create TFW files If on, external georeferencing files are
created for GeoTIFFs .
Write coordinate block If on, positional information is written into
the structure of Intergraph GRD files.
Byte order Defines the byte order for Raw image formats
related to the processor type: Intel or
Motorola.
Outside points Defines for Xyz text files how to handle grid
points outside the lattice model area where
no elevation value can be derived from the
source data:
· Skip - outside grid points are not written
into the text file.
· Output - outside grid points are written into
the text file using the constant value given
in the Using Z field.
File naming Defines the file naming method if several
output files are created:
· Enter name for each - the software asks you
to enter a name for each lattice file that is
created.
· Selected text elements - the software uses
a text element placed and selected inside
the rectangle(s) as file name.
This is only active if Export is set to Selected
rectangle(s).
Directory Directory for storing the output file(s). This is
only active if File naming is set to Selected
text elements.
Extension File extension for the output file(s). This is
only active if File naming is set to Selected
text elements.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Export / Raster image > 341

Export / Raster image

Not Lite

Raster image command creates image files from a surface model. It can either create an output
file for the whole surface model or for the area defined by a selected rectangle. The coloring
can be based on the elevation values of a surface model or on elevation differences between
two surface models. The images can be created using color depths of 24 bit (true-color), 256
colors, or 8 bit (gray-scale).

To export a raster image:

1. (Optional) Draw and select a rectangle that defines the area of the output file.

2. (Optional) Select a surface model from the list in the Surfaces window.

3. Select Raster image command from the File / Export menu.

This opens the Export Raster Image dialog:

4. Define settings and click OK.

TerraModeler computes the pixel colors and then opens another Export Raster Image dialog,
a standard dialog for saving files.

5. Enter a name for the output file and click OK.

A raster image is created.

SETTING EFFECT
Export Area covered by the output file:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Export / Raster image > 342

SETTING EFFECT

· Whole surface - the complete surface

model is exported.
· Selected rectangle - the area defined by a
selected rectangle is exported. This is only
active if a rectangular shape is selected.
Format File format of the output file: Windows BMP
or GeoTIFF.
Color by Attribute used for coloring the output file:
· Elevation - coloring based on the elevation
values of a surface model.
· Vertical difference - coloring based on the
vertical difference between two surface
models.
· Shortest distance - coloring based on the
shortest distance between two surface
models.
· Shaded surface - coloring based on lightning
conditions.
Surface(s) Name of the surface(s) to be used for output
file creation. If color by is set to Vertical
difference or Shortest distance, two surfaces
must be selected.
Step Size of each pixel in the output file.
Attach as reference If on, the output file is attached as reference
in MicroStation. (MicroStation only)
Colors Color depth of the output raster image:
· 24 Bit Color - true-color image.
· 256 Colors - 256 colors image.
· Grey scale - 8 bit gray scale image.

Scheme Type of color scheme:

· Cold to hot - varies from blue color hues for
low values to red color hues for high values.
· Hot to cold - varies from red color hues for
low values to blue color hues for high
values.
· Selected colors - you can define an own
coloring scheme. Click on the Define button
in order to define a Color scheme for 8 bit
color images or a Color scheme for 24 bit
color images.
Degree Determines how the color hues are
distributed in Cold to hot and Hot to cold color
schemes:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Export / Raster image > 343

SETTING EFFECT

· Hot, Warm - color hues are shifted to the

red-yellow color range.
· Linear - color hues are linearly distributed.
· Cool, Cold - color hues are shifted to the
blue-green color range.

Color scheme for raster image files

The Color Scheme dialog lets you define a color scheme for the raster image export files. The
dialog uses the RGB or the HSV color models. The software creates smooth transitions between
the colors assigned to the color scheme.

The vertical bar on the left shows all the colors currently assigned in the scheme. Each color
boundary has an elevation label displaying the elevation where a smooth color change occurs.
The text label is black, if the elevation boundary is fixed. A white text indicates that the
elevation boundary has not been fixed and is recalculated if you change the number of colors in
the scheme.

From the coloring scheme dialog, you can save a coloring scheme file to a hard disk.

USE MENU ITEM TO

File / Open Open a previously saved color scheme file.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Export / Raster image > 344

USE MENU ITEM TO

File / Save As Save the color scheme to a file.
Color / Remove last Remove last color from the color scheme.
Color / Remove all Remove all colors from the color scheme.

To assign a new color:

1. Define the Color model you want to use.

2. Click in the color field on the right at the location of the color you want to add to the color
scheme.
OR

2. Define Red Green Blue or Hue Saturation Value values by typing a number or moving the
slider. The RGB values can range from 0 to 255, the H value can range from 0 to 359, the SV
values from 0 to 100.
This selects the color and adjusts the values in the RGB or HSV fields. The selected color is
displayed in the Color field.

3. Click Add in order to add the selected color to the color scheme.
The color is added to the lower end of the bar, thus, the first selected color is assigned to the
highest elevation values.

To fix an elevation boundary:

1. Click on the text label of the elevation boundary.
This opens the Color Elevation dialog

2. Switch Fixed on and enter an Elevation value on which to fix the color transition.

3. Click OK.
This recalculates the other elevation boundaries according to the fixed elevation value.

To create a new color scheme:

1. Select Remove all command from the Color pulldown menu in the Coloring scheme dialog.
This removes all assigned colors from the current color scheme.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Export / Raster image > 345

2. Assign new colors to the color scheme as described above.

3. (Optional) Save the color scheme as a file on a hard disk using the Save as command from the
File pulldown menu in the Color Scheme dialog.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Export / Triangle text file > 346

Export / Triangle text file

Triangle text file command creates a text file from surface model triangles. The triangles can be
written into simple text files for points and edges, into exchange format text files, such as
LandXML, or into survey application-specific text files. Supported triangle text file formats are
4ce DOT, GMS, InfraModel 4.0, ICC, Moss triangulation, LandXML 1.0/1.2, Point & edges text
file, SMS / WMS and WorldToolKit NFF.

To create a text file from surface model triangles

1. Select Triangle text file command from the File / Export pulldown menu.
The Export Triangle Text File dialog opens:

2. Select a Surface for which to export the triangles.

3. Select a Format for the output file.

4. If required by the format, define additional settings.

5. Click OK.
This opens another Export triangle text file dialog, a standard dialog for saving files. If
triangle points and edges are saved into separate files, the dialog opens for a second time
after saving the first file.

6. Enter a name for the output file and click OK.

This saves the triangles into the text file(s).

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Name of the surface model for which to
export the triangles. The list includes all
surface models that are open in
TerraModeler.
Format Format of the output file.
Any additional settings depend on the
selected format for the output file.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Export / Triangle text file > 347

SETTING EFFECT
ID Surface identifier for GMS triangle files.
Output name Name of the surface model written into
LandXML 1.0, LandXML 1.2 and Inframodel
files.
Prepend file name If on, the model's Output name is added to
the Surface name tag in LandXML 1.2 and
InfraModel files. Example: <Surface
name="output file name - model name">
Write excluded triangles If on, excluded triangles are written into
LandXML 1.2 and InfraModel files.
Header Opens the Inframodel Export Header dialog
which allows the input of metadata for
InfraModel files.
Y Axis up If on, the coordinate system is rotated in a
way that the Y axis points up for exporting
triangle coordinates into WorldToolKit NFF
files.
Output textures If on, domain-related texture information is
written into WorldToolKit NFF files.

Inframodel Export Header

The Inframodel Export Header dialog lets you define metadata for InfraModel ouput files.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Export / Triangle text file > 348

SETTING EFFECT
Project name Free text for the Project name tag.
Project description Free text for the Project desc tag.
Company name Free text for the Author company tag.
Company URL Free text for the Author companyURL tag.
Author Free text for the Author createdBy tag.
Email Free text for the Author createdByEmail tag.
Type Type of coordinate system definition: EPSG
or Other.
EPSG code Code number of an EPSG coordinate system
definition. This is only active if Type is set to
EPSG.
Horizontal name Name of the ellipsoid definition.
Vertical name Name of the height system definition.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Export / Xyz text file > 349

Export / Xyz text file

Xyz text file command creates a text file from surface model points. The points can be written
into a simple text file where the easting, northing, and elevation coordinates of each point are
stored in one line, or into survey application-specific text files. Supported text file formats are
Geodimeter, Gemini, Tekla, Wild GRE, Wild COGO, and XYZ Text.

To create a text file from surface model points

1. Select a surface in the Surfaces window.

2. Select Xyz text file command from the File / Export menu.
The Export Xyz dialog opens:

3. Select a Format for the output file.

4. If another format than XYZ Text is selected, define additional settings.

5. Click OK.
This opens the File for point output dialog, a standard dialog for saving files.

6. Enter a name for the output file and click OK.

This creates the output file.

SETTING EFFECT
Format Format of the output file.
Tekla Order of fields in Tekla text files. This is only
active when Format is set to Tekla.
Codes Feature codes for different surface point
types in the output file. This is only active if

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Export / Xyz text file > 350

SETTING EFFECT
Format is not set to XYZ Text.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Import / InfraModel file > 351

Import / InfraModel file

InfraModel file command creates a new surface model from InfraModel 4.0 files.

To import InfraModel files:

1. Select InfraModel file command from the File / Import pulldown menu.
A new surface model is created from the input file. After the import is finished, a message
shows the amount of points that are included in the surface model.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Import / LandXML file > 352

Import / LandXML file

LandXML file command creates a new surface model from LandXML files.

To import LandXML files:

1. Select LandXML file command from the File / Import pulldown menu.
A new surface model is created from the input file. After the import is finished, a message
shows the amount of points that are included in the surface model.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Import / Lattice file > 353

Import / Lattice file

Not Lite

Lattice file command imports lattice files and create a triangulated surface model using the
grid-based points. Accepted lattice file formats are ArcInfo Grid, Intergraph GRD, Finnish
National Land Survey Disimp grid files and Ordnance Survey NTF grid files.

To import a lattice file:

1. Select Lattice file command from the File / Import pulldown menu.
This opens the Import grid file dialog, a standard dialog for opening files.

2. Locate the file that stores the surface model points.

This opens the Import Lattice File dialog:

3. Define settings and click OK.

This opens the Surface settings dialog. Continue as described for File / New surface
command.
A new surface model is created from the lattice file.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Surface to be created from the lattice file.
Always New surface.
Z unit Unit of the elevation values in the lattice file.
Thin model If on, the software leaves out less relevant
points from the lattice file in order to reduce
the file size of the surface model file.
Tolerance Elevation tolerance for creating the model
from the original lattice file. The surface
model may differ in elevation up to the given
value from the original. This is only active if
Thin model is switched on.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Import / Lattice file > 354

A triangulated surface model requires a lot more memory than a lattice model file, if all the
lattice points are used in the triangulation. Therefore, it might be necessary to leave out
some of the lattice points. TerraModeler is capable of leaving out less relevant points and
still building a triangulated network within a given tolerance of the original grid points.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Import / Triangles > 355

Import / Triangles
Triangles command creates a new surface model from triangle elements drawn in the CAD file.
This can be used, for example, to import a triangulated surface model created by another
application.

To import triangles from the CAD file:

1. Select Triangles command from the File / Import pulldown menu.
This opens the Import Triangles dialog:

2. Define settings and click OK.

This opens the Surface settings dialog. Follow the common steps for Creating a surface
model.
A new surface model is created from the triangle elements. The triangle structure of the
surface model is identical with the original triangle elements.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Surface to be created from the triangles.
Always New surface.
From level Level in the CAD file on which the triangle
elements are located.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Import / XYZ binary file > 356

Import / XYZ binary file

Xyz binary file command is used to create a new surface model or to add points to an existing
model from a TerraScan binary file. The binary file stores at least the easting, northing and
elevation coordinates for each point of the model.

The binary file may have additional fields, such as the point code, which determines the type of
the point. See Point Types for the code definitions.

To import points from a binary file

1. Select Xyz binary file command from the File / Import pulldown menu.
This opens the Import Xyz binary file dialog, a standard dialog for opening files.

2. Locate the file that stores the surface model points.

This opens the Code Usage dialog which defines point codes and their usage for the surface
model creation:

By default, a new code definition file includes a line for Any other code used as random
points in a surface model. You can add specific code definitions by using the Add button in
the Code usage dialog.
The Code definition dialog opens where you can enter a Code, (optional) a Description, and
define how points with this code are used. Available surface model elements are Random
point, Soft breakline, Hard breakline, Contour, 2d hole, 3d hole. Points with certain codes
may also be ignored for the import.
You can modify or delete a code definition by using the Edit or Delete buttons respectively in
the Code usage dialog. Use commands from the File pulldown menu in order to save the
code definitions into a file, open an existing code definition file, or create a new file.

3. If required, create additional code definitions in the Code usage dialog.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Import / XYZ binary file > 357

4. (Optional) Save the code definitions into a text file using the Save as command from the File
pulldown menu in the Code usage dialog.
The code definitions are saved into a text file with the ending .COD.

5. Click OK.
This opens the Triangulate surface dialog. Follow the common steps for Creating a surface
model.
A new surface model is created from the Xyz binary file or the points are added to an existing
surface model.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Import / XYZ text file > 358

Import / XYZ text file

Xyz text file command in used to create a new surface model or to add points to an existing
model from a text file. The text file stores at least the easting, northing, and elevation
coordinates for each point of the model.

TerraModeler requires that one row in a text file represents one point. The coordinates have to
be stored in fields separated by white space, comma, or semicolon. The text file may have
additional fields, such as a point number, code, a text string, pen up field, or any other fields
that can be ignored for the import.

To import points from a text file

1. Select Xyz text file command from the File / Import pulldown menu.
This opens the Import Xyz text file dialog, a standard dialog for opening files.

2. Locate the text file that stores the surface model points.
This opens the File Format for Import dialog:

TerraModeler reads the first 25 rows from the text file and displays them in the dialog. The
Delimiter is detected automatically.

3. Check the Delimiter and select the fields where E, N, and Z coordinates are stored.

4. If required, define additional fields and settings.

5. Click OK.
This opens the Point Usage dialog:

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Importing and Exporting Data > Import / XYZ text file > 359

6. Define whether to use the points as Random points or as Breakline points.

7. Click OK.
This opens the Triangulate surface dialog. Follow the common steps for Creating a surface
model.
A new surface model is created from the Xyz text file or the points are added to an existing
surface model.

SETTING EFFECT
Delimiter Character that separates the fields in a line of
one point from each other: Space, Comma, or
Semicolon.
Non-continuous point number breaks string If on, breaklines are split into separate chains
if the point number increment is bigger than
1.
Invalid row breaks the string If on, breaklines are split into separate chains
if there is an empty or invalid line in the input
text file.
Attributes for fields in the text file Attribute that is stored for a point in a specific
field:
· Ignore - the field is ignored during import.
· E, N, Z - easting, northing, elevation
coordinates.
· Code - text string. Defines, for example, the
type of a breakline element.
· Number - point number.
· String - chain number. Defines, for example,
continuous breakline elements.
· Pen up - marks the end of a chain if it is not
0.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Lattice Database > > 360

Lattice Database
Not Lite, Not UAV

A lattice database in TerraModeler is a collection of grid-based files placed in the same

directory on a hard disk. The lattice files are typically produced by a national land survey
organization that manages elevation data covering the whole country. This type of data
provides an inexpensive way to create a small-scale surface model of large areas or a quick way
to derive approximate elevation values for any location in the country.

TerraModeler offers some dedicated tools which can extract elevation values from a collection
of lattice files. The tools search for lattice files in a directory that is specified in Lattice database
category of the TerraModeler Settings. All tools require that the CAD file uses the same
coordinate system as the lattice files were created with.

Supported lattice file formats include:

· Disimp - used by the National Land Survey of Finland.

· Ordnance Survey NTF - used by the UK Ordnance Survey.
· Intergraph GRD - has to be orthonormal.

TO USE COMMAND
Draw boundaries for the lattice database Lattice database / Draw boundaries
area
View lattice database elevation values View Elevation tool
Draw contours for lattice database files into Lattice database / Draw contours
the CAD file
Triangulate lattice database points Lattice database / Import fence contents

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Lattice Database > Lattice database / Draw boundaries > 361

Lattice database / Draw boundaries

Not Lite, Not UAV

Draw boundaries command draws the boundaries of all lattice files in the lattice file directory
into the CAD file. The command can be used, for example, to check what areas are covered by
the lattice database files. This may be the first thing you do before working with lattice
database files.

The boundaries are drawn as shape elements using the active level and symbology settings in
the CAD file. The name of each lattice file is placed as text element at the center of the
corresponding rectangle using active text setting in the CAD file.

To draw lattice file boundaries into the CAD file:

1. Select Draw boundaries command in the Utility / Lattice database pulldown menu.
This scans through the lattice database and draws rectangular shapes and text elements into
the CAD file showing the area covered by each file. An information dialog is displayed that
shows for how many lattice files the boundaries are drawn.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Lattice Database > Lattice database / Draw contours > 362

Lattice database / Draw contours

Not Lite, Not UAV

Draw contours command draws contour lines, labels, and ticks for lattice database files.

To draw contours for lattice database files:

1. Select Draw contours command from the Utility / Lattice database pulldown menu.
This opens the Draw Grid Contours dialog, a standard dialog for opening files.

2. Select the lattice file(s) for drawing contours.

The Display Contours dialog opens:

The dialog is a reduced version of the Display Contours dialog described for the Display
Contours tool. It provides the same options for drawing contour lines, labels and ticks, and
for saving and loading contour settings files.

3. Define settings and click OK.

This draws the contours into the CAD file.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Lattice Database > Lattice database / Import fence contents > 363

Lattice database / Import fence contents

Not Lite, Not UAV, Not Spatix

Import fence contents command provides an option for creating a triangulated surface model
from lattice database points inside a fence. The fence may overlap several individual lattice
files. A triangulated surface model enables the addition of new elevation data, such as random
points or breaklines. However, changes to the surface model can not be saved into the lattice
database files.

A triangulated surface model requires a lot more memory than a lattice model file, if all the
lattice points are used in the triangulation. Therefore, it might be necessary to leave out some
of the lattice points. TerraModeler is capable of leaving out less relevant points and still
building a triangulated network within a given tolerance of the original grid points.

To triangulate lattice database points:

1. Place a rectangular fence.

2. Select Import fence contents command from the Utility / Lattice database pulldown menu.
This opens the Import Lattice File dialog:

3. Define settings and click OK.

This opens the Surface Settings dialog. Continue as described for the File / New surface
command.
The software processes all lattice files inside the fence and creates a triangulated surface
model from the points.

SETTING EFFECT
Surface Surface to be created from the lattice file.
Always New surface.
Thin model If on, the software leaves out less relevant
points from the lattice file in order to reduce
the file size of the surface model file.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Lattice Database > Lattice database / Import fence contents > 364

SETTING EFFECT
Tolerance Elevation tolerance for creating the model
from the original lattice file. The surface
model may differ in elevation up to the given
value from the original. This is only active if
Thin model is switched on.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Lattice Database > Viewing lattice database elevation > 365

Viewing lattice database elevation

Not Lite, Not UAV

View Elevation tool can display lattice database elevation values. In the tool’s dialog, select
Lattice database as the Surface to view. If you move the mouse pointer inside the lattice
database area, TerraModeler determines the correct lattice file and displays the elevation
value closest to the mouse pointer location.

Additionally, you can use the Point on surface lock to place elements on the elevation level of
the lattice database files. This offers a simple way to place an element on the approximate
ground elevation anywhere in the area covered by the lattice database files.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Key-in commands/Spaccels > > 366

Key-in commands/Spaccels
Key-in commands (MicroStation) or Spaccels (Spatix accelerates) are a way to speed up the call
of tools and menu commands. The CAD platforms offer command lines where you can type and
execute the commands. In addition, commands can be assigned to keys (function keys in
MicroStation). This speeds up some manual tasks significantly as you can call tools by pressing a
key instead of mouse clicks. Especially tools with optional parameters in their call commands
are well suited for speeding up manual work with keys.

SPATIX MICROSTATION
Tools in TerraModeler can be started by Most of the tools in TerraScan can be started
entering a spaccel in the Spatix Spaccels by entering a key-in command in the
window. The window contains a command MicroStation Key-in line. The Browse Key-in
line and two lists that help to find the correct option of the Key-in line can be used to find
syntax of a command. out the syntax of a key-in command.

The upper list in the Spaccels window lists all If you select TMODEL in the list at the lower
available spaccels. This includes commands right corner of the Browse Key-in dialog, the
for calling tools of Spatix and any loaded selection of commands is limited to
IxApp, such as Terra applications. TerraModeler commands only. There are four
If you know approximately the beginning of list fields that show available commands.
the command syntax, start typing the first Select the first word of a command in the left
word. The list of spaccels is reduced to those list. This adds the word to the command line
that start with the typed letters. This helps to and displays matching second words in the
find the correct command syntax. second-left list field. Select the second word
You can select a spaccel from the list with a of a command. This adds the word to the
double-click. This writes the spaccel in the command line and displays any matching
command line on the top of the window. third words in the next list field. Continue
Press <Enter> in order to execute the until a command is complete.
command. This starts the corresponding tool. If you know approximately, how a command
The lower list in the Spaccels window lists looks like, you may start typing the command
spaccels that have been executed. To repeat a in the Key-in line. The software automatically
command, you may select it from this list with completes words of the command, so you just
a double-click and press <Enter>. type the first letter(s) and then, confirm the
suggested word with <Space>.
Press <Enter> in order to execute a key-in
command. This starts the corresponding tool

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Key-in commands/Spaccels > > 367

SPATIX MICROSTATION
or performs another action called by the
command.
In Spatix, you can assign commands to any key In MicroStation, you can assign commands to
or combination of keys. Key assignments are function keys. This is done in the Function
defined in the Shortcuts window. The keys category of User Settings. You first need
window lists all tools/function calls of the to select the function key and then, type the
software and lets you define a key correct command in the command line. Set
(combination) for selected ones. In addition, the command with <Enter>.
Spaccels for commands with optional
parameters can be defined and assigned to a
key (combination) as well.

This Chapter lists a selection of commands and their optional parameters. Some of them you
may consider assigning to keys. For each command, a link to the corresponding tool or menu
command is given. Use this link to jump to a more detailed description of the tool/command.

The syntax of commands/spaccels is the same in all CAD platforms. Also optional parameters
for function calls are defined in the same way.

KEY-IN COMMAND
Model app main
Model close surfaces
Model write text
Save surfaces

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Key-in commands/Spaccels > Key-in commands - M > 368

Model App Main

Model App Main opens the TerraModeler toolbox. By default, the toolbox is opened when
TerraModeler is loaded. The command can be used to re-open the toolbox after it was
accidentally closed.

Syntax:
model app main

Model Close Surfaces

Model Close Surfaces key-in command closes all surfaces that are loaded in TerraModeler.

Syntax:
model close surfaces

Corresponding command: Close all

Model Write Text

Model Write Text key-in command writes LandXML files. It requires a surface model loaded in
TerraModeler. The command may include a variable for the LandXML file name in order to avoid
that existing files are overwritten. The variable may be related to TerraScan project blocks from
which the surface model has been created.

Syntax:
model write text landxml12 d:\myproject\output\#bnumber.xml

PARAMETER EFFECT
landxml12 LandXML file format in version 1.2.
d:\myproject\output\#bnumber.xml Location and name of the output file.
#bnumber is a variable that will be replaced
by the number of a block in a TerraScan
project. The same variable may be used for
creating the surface model to export.

Corresponding command: Export Triangle Text File

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Key-in commands/Spaccels > Key-in commands - S > 369

Save Surfaces

Save Surfaces key-in command saves all surface models loaded in TerraModeler to their files on
the hard disk.

Syntax:
save surfaces

Corresponding menu command: Save all

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Breakline types > > 370

Breakline types

TerraModeler knows the following breakline types which are closely related to the Point Types
of the TIN format:

BR DESCRI TYPICAL EXAMPLES

EA PTION
KLI
NE
TY
PE
Ra Rando Surveyed point features, thinned ground points from a point cloud,
nd mly model keypoints.
o distrib
m uted
po point
int eleme
nts.

Ha 3D line Edges of hard surfaces, sharp terrain slope edges.

rd eleme
br nt that
ea repres
kli ents a
ne sharp
edge in
a
surface
.
Vertice
s of the
line
eleme
nt are
added
to the
TIN
and
thus,
effect
the TIN
structu
re.
So 3D line Smooth, "round" terrain slope edges.
ft eleme

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Breakline types > > 371

br nt that
ea repres
kli ents a
ne smoot
h edge
in a
surface
.
Vertice
s of the
line
eleme
nt are
added
to the
TIN
and
thus,
effect
the TIN
structu
re.
Gu 2D line Quick solution for approximate terrain slope edges.
idi eleme
ng nt that
br forces
ea triangl
kli e
ne edges
to
follow
its
directi
on. No
additio
nal
vertice
s are
added
to the
TIN
from
this
type of
breakli
ne.
Co 3D Common contour lines that represent the ground surface.
nt contou
r line

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Breakline types > > 372

ou eleme
r nt.

2D 2D Building footprints.
ho shape
le eleme
nt that
repres
ents
void
areas
("gaps"
) in a
surface
model.
The
elevati
on
along
the
bound
ary is
determ
ined by
the
closest
elevati
on
next to
the
polygo
n
bound
ary. In
the TIN
file
format
specifi
cation,
this is
referre
d to as
"inner

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Breakline types > > 373

bound
ary".
3D 3D Water boundaries.
ho shape
le eleme
nt that
repres
ents
void
areas
("gaps"
) in a
surface
model.
The
elevati
on
along
the
bound
ary is
determ
ined by
the
elevati
on of
the
polygo
n
bound
ary. In
the TIN
file
format
specifi
cation,
this is
referre
d to as
"inner
bound
ary".
2D 2D A surface model should have only one outer boundary.
bo shape
un eleme
da nt
ry repres
enting
the

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Breakline types > > 374

outer
bound
ary of a
surface
model.
Areas
outsid
e of
the
bound
ary are
invalid
and
not
part of
the
surface
model.
The
elevati
on
along
the
bound
ary is
determ
ined by
the
closest
elevati
on
next to
the
shape
bound
ary.
3D 3D A surface model should have only one outer boundary.
bo shape
un eleme
da nt
ry repres
enting
the
outer
bound
ary of a
surface
model.
Areas

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Breakline types > > 375

outsid
e of
the
bound
ary are
invalid
and
not
part of
the
surface
model.
The
elevati
on
along
the
bound
ary is
determ
ined by
the
elevati
on of
the
shape
bound
ary.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TIN File Format Specification > > 376

TIN File Format Specification

This chapter describes a triangulated surface model file format of TerraModeler. The file format
is free for anyone to read and write. It is recommended to use extension .tin for TerraModeler
TIN files but this is not mandatory.

The file format is meant for storing triangulated terrain models. The file format can store both
xyz points and triangles which connect the points.

The triangle records are optional in the file. They may be left out of the file to save disc space if
no manual editing of the surface has been done. The point records store all the relevant
information from which the triangulation can be calculated as needed. However, if a user
modifies the surface model (for example, assign additional breakline connections between
points, mark areas as excluded, etc.), the triangle information must be stored and the triangle
records contain the up-to-date edges of the surface.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TIN File Format Specification > File Organization > 377

File Organization
The file contains binary data consisting of a file header, a number of point records and a
number of triangle records. The header must appear first in the file. It is recommended that
point records start immediately after the header and triangle records immediately after point
records.

Triangle records are optional. The file format may be used to store surface model points only
with the intention of triangulating those when actively used.

Data Types

The format definition used the following data types:

C TYPE SIZE ALIAS

char 1 byte
unsigned char 1 byte BYTE
long 4 bytes
unsigned long 4 bytes UINT
unsigned __int64 8 bytes UINT64
double 8 bytes IEEE floating point

All data is in big-endian format. For example, the long integer value of 16909060 (or 0x01020304
in hexadecimal) is stored in a way that the first byte has value 4, the second byte value 3, the
third byte value 2, and the fourth byte value 1.

All strings must be null-terminated (have value zero to mark end of string).

File Header

The file header is at the beginning of the file and contains 160 bytes. The header fields which
are not required and not used must be filled with zero.

DATA TYPE ITEM SIZE REQUIRED

Format Recognition
char[4] 4 bytes Yes
String
Format Recognition
UINT 4 bytes Yes
Value
UINT Version 4 bytes Yes
UINT Header Size 4 bytes Yes

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TIN File Format Specification > File Organization > 378

UINT Number of Points 4 bytes Yes

UINT Point Size 4 bytes Yes
UINT Number of Triangles 4 bytes Yes
UINT Triangle Size 4 bytes Yes
char[40] Surface Name 40 bytes No
char[40] Software 40 bytes No
UINT Surface Type 4 bytes No
Coordinate
UINT 4 bytes Yes
Resolution
double X Origin 8 bytes Yes
double Y Origin 8 bytes Yes
double Z Origin 8 bytes Yes
UINT64 Point Data Position 8 bytes Yes
UINT64 Triangle Data Position 8 bytes Yes

Header fields:

· Format Recognition String - must contain “TTIN”. Used for file recognition.
· Format Recognition Value - must contain value 20101221. Used for file recognition.
· Version - must contain value 1.
· Header Size - normally set to value 160.
· Number of Points - total number of point records in the file.
· Point Size - size of each point record. Normally set to value 14.
· Number of Triangles - total number of triangle records in the file.
· Triangle Size - size of each triangle record. Normally set to value 26.
· Surface Name - descriptive name for the surface such as “Ground”.
· Software - software which generated the file. For example “TerraModeler”.
· Surface Type - surface type which may be used to categorize models of sub soil layers or
other types of terrain surfaces. This is most often zero (= ground).
· Coordinate Resolution - number of integer steps in a real world unit. If the real world unit is
meter and the coordinate resolution is 100, each integer step in point record x, y, and z fields
corresponds to one centimeter.
· X, Y and Z Origin - center of the coordinate system in real world units.
· Point Data Position - file position where the point records start. File position is relative to
the beginning of the file. This should normally be 160.
· Triangle Data Position - file position where triangle records start.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TIN File Format Specification > File Organization > 379

Point Record

Point records store information about the points from which the model is built.

DATA TYPE ITEM SIZE

long X 4 bytes
long Y 4 bytes
long Z 4 bytes
BYTE Break 1 byte
BYTE Type 1 byte

Point record fields:

· X - X coordinate of the point.

· Y - Y coordinate of the point.
· Z - Z coordinate of the point.
· Break - 0 if the point is a random point or the first point in a breakline sequence. 1 if point is
meant to be connected by a breakline edge with the previous point record.
· Type - point type. See Point Types for more information.

Each linear breakline feature appears as consecutive point records. The first point of a breakline
should have Break = 0 and Type should be non-zero. All additional points of the same breakline
should have Break = 1 and Type should be the same as for the first point.

Triangle Record

Triangle records store the actual triangulation and the neighbor relation of the triangles.

DATA TYPE ITEM SIZE

UINT[3] Vertex 12 bytes
UINT[3] Neighbor 12 bytes
BYTE Flags 1 byte
BYTE Domain 1 byte

Triangle record fields:

· Vertex - three points in clockwise order. Value 0 refers to the first point record.
· Neighbor - neighboring triangles in clockwise order. Value 0 means no neighboring triangle.
Value 1 refers to first triangle record. Neighbor[0] is the triangle on the other side of edge
Vertex[0] - Vertex[1]. Neighbor[1] is the triangle on the other side of edge Vertex[1] -
Vertex[2]. Neighbor[2] is the triangle on the other side of edge Vertex[2] - Vertex[0].
· Flags - active/excluded/deleted state of the triangle and edge types.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TIN File Format Specification > File Organization > 380

· Domain - region or land type. 0 for undefined or default value.

The different bits in the Flags field have the following meaning:

· Bits 0-1 - triangle state: 0 = active, 1 = auto excluded, 2 = user excluded, 3 = deleted
· Bits 2-3 - type of edge 0: 0 = normal, 1 = soft break, 2 = hard break, 3 = other break
· Bits 4-5 - type of edge 1
· Bits 6-7 - type of edge 2

Coordinate Values

The X coordinate value is normally the same as easting.

The Y coordinate value is normally the same as northing.

The Z coordinate value is normally the same as elevation.

Point records store coordinate values as 32 bit integers to save disc space. To translate integer
values into normal projection system coordinate values in meters or feet, the following
equations have to be used:
WorldX = XOrigin + X / CoordinateResolution
WorldY = YOrigin + Y / CoordinateResolution
WorldZ = ZOrigin + Z / CoordinateResolution

Point Types

The Type field in the point record indicates the point type. Valid point types are:

· 0 - random point.
· 1 - point is part of a soft breakline element.
· 2 - point is part of a hard breakline element.
· 3 - point is part of a contour line.
· 4 - point is an inferred point at the top of a hill or at the bottom of a depression. These
points may be automatically generated for hills and depressions when generating a surface
from contours.
· 5 - point is part of an outer boundary. An outer boundary is defined by a clockwise polygon
where the area outside the polygon is invalid. The last point record in the sequence has the
same coordinates as the first point record in order to close the polygon. A surface model
should not have more than one outer boundary.
· 6 - point is part of an inner boundary. An inner boundary is defined by a clockwise polygon
where the area inside the polygon is invalid (“hole”). The last point record in the sequence
has the same coordinates as the first point record in order to close the polygon.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TIN File Format Specification > C Structure Definitions > 381

C Structure Definitions

// TIN file header

typedef struct {
char RecogStr[4] ; // Recognition "TTIN"
UINT RecogVal ; // Recognition 20101221
UINT Version ; // Version 1
UINT HdrSize ; // Header size = sizeof(SurfHdr)
UINT PntCnt ; // Number of points
UINT PntSize ; // Size of each point 12
UINT TriCnt ; // Number of triangles
UINT TriSize ; // Size of each triangle 28
char Desc[40] ; // Descriptive name for surface
char Software[40] ; // Software which generated the file
UINT Type ; // Surface type
(0=ground,1=design,2=bedrock,..)
UINT CoordSize ; // Number of integer steps per real world
unit
double OrgX ; // Origin of coordinate system
double OrgY ;
double OrgZ ;
UINT64 PntPos ; // File position where point data starts
UINT64 TriPos ; // File position where triangle data starts
} TinHdr ;

// TIN file point record

typedef struct {
long X ;
long Y ;
long Z ;
BYTE Break ; // Break line edge with previous point
BYTE Type ; // Point type TINPT_xxxx
} TinPnt ;

// TIN file triangle record

typedef struct {
UINT Vertex[3] ; // Triangle vertices in clockwise order
UINT Neigbour[3]; // Neighbour triangle indexes
BYTE Flags ; // Bits 0-1:excluded,2-3:edge0,4-5:edge1,6-
7:edge2
BYTE Domain ; // Region or land type
} TinTri ;

// Point types

#define TINPT_RANDOM 0
#define TINPT_SOFTBRK 1
#define TINPT_HARDBRK 2
#define TINPT_CONTOUR 3
#define TINPT_INFERRED 4

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

TIN File Format Specification > C Structure Definitions > 382

#define TINPT_OUTBND 5
#define TINPT_INTBND 6

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Configuration Variables for MicroStation > > 383

Configuration Variables for MicroStation

MicroStation is able to locate TerraModeler with the help of configuration variables. When you
install TerraModeler, the installation program creates a configuration file TERRA.CFG which
defines the required environment variables. This file is placed in MicroStation's CONFIG\APPL
directory.

For example, C:\...\MICROSTATION\CONFIG\APPL\TERRA.CFG contains:

#-------------------------------------------------------

# TERRA.CFG - Configuration for Terra Applications

#-------------------------------------------------------

TERRADIR=c:/terra/

TERRACFG=$(TERRADIR)config/

MS_MDLAPPS < $(TERRADIR)ma/

MS_HELPPATH < $(TERRADIR)docs/

%if exists ($(TERRACFG)*.cfg)

% include $(TERRACFG)*.cfg

%endif

This configuration file includes the application-specific configuration files in C:\TERRA\CONFIG

directory. TerraModeler's configuration file TMODEL.CFG contains:
#-------------------------------------------------------

# TMODEL.CFG - TerraModeler Configuration File

#-------------------------------------------------------

# Directory for storing the user license file (TMODEL.LIC)

TMODEL_LICENSE=$(TERRADIR)license/

# Directory for application settings (TMODEL.INF)

TMODEL_SET=$(TERRADIR)/tmodel/

In a default configuration, MicroStation automatically includes these settings as configuration

variables. You can check the values for these variables in the Configuration Variables dialog of
MicroStation. In case these variables have not been defined correctly, you should define them
manually.

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

Installation Directories > > 384

Installation Directories
TerraModeler shares the same directory structure with all Terra Applications. It is
recommended that you install all Terra Applications in the same directory.

The list below shows a typical directory structure when TerraModeler has been installed in path
C:\TERRA64.

C:\TERRA64 installation directory for Terra

applications
 app application files for Spatix
 tscan.ix application
 config application configuration files
 tmodel.cfg defines environment variables for
MicroStation
 tmodel.ini defines environment variables for
Spatix

 docs documentation, such as user guides in

PDF format

 example sample files

 tmodel.dgn example MicroStation design file

 tmodel.clr example color scheme

 license user license files

 tmodel.lic user license

 ma application files for MicroStation

 seed seed files, templates

 seed3dcm.dgn seed file for creating MicroStation 3D
design files with centimeter resolution
 seed3dcm.spx template for creating Spatix files with
centimeter resolution
 seed3dmm.dgn seed file for creating MicroStation 3D
design files with millimeter resolution
 seed3dmm.spx template for creating Spatix files with
millimeter resolution

 tmodel user settings and configuration files

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

 385
Index
Set area domain 157
Set domain between lines 158
-A- Set triangle domain 159
Draw Alignment Sections 228
Add inferred points 296
Draw Profile 234
Alignment Offset 174
Draw Section View 239
Area 196
Drop area 197 Draw Surface Intersection 281
Exclude area 199 Drop Element On Surface 164
Flatten area 201
Insert hole element 203
Move area 205
-E-
Remove area 207 Erase Display 148
Exclude long triangles 298

-C- Exclude Triangle 211

Export 335, 336, 338, 341, 346, 349
Calculate Slope 161
Check Linear Elevations 80
Compare Elevations 163
-F-
Compress 297 Fields 333
Compute Alignment Quantity 256 Fill Area With Cells 167
Compute Area 260 Fix Touching Elements 180
Compute Prismoidal Quantity 262 Force Downstream Flow 181
Compute Quantity 264
Compute Section Quantity 270
Compute Tunnel Volume 275 -I-
Connect Linear Elements 176
Import 335, 353, 355, 356, 358
Construct Breakline 209
Insert Breakline Element 91
Copy Linear Element 177
Insert Point 213
Copy surface 311
Insert Point Along Breakline 214
Insert Random Elements 93
-D-
Define Coordinate Setup 220 -L-
Define Section Templates 278
Label Area 182
Delete surface 298
Label Elevation 183
Densify Linear Element 179
Label Peaks and Pits 149
Display Boundary 124
Label Profile Elevations 241
Display Contours 125
Lattice database 312, 360
Display Drainage 106 Draw boundaries 361
Display Elevation Texts 134 Draw contours 362
Display Grid 137 Import fence contents 363
Display Raster Triangles 109 View elevation 365
Display Region Triangles 110
Lift 2D Contours 82
Display Shaded Surface 139
Display Slopes 143
Display Themes 111
Display Triangles 146
-M-
Domains 152 Measure Slope 184
Define domains 153 Merge surfaces 312
Display domain triangles 155 Modify Contour Symbology 114
Domain view 156 Modify elevations 300

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd

 386
Index
Modify settings 301 Subtract surfaces 331
Move Point 215 Surfaces 87, 120, 226, 295
Close 303
Create 91, 93, 96, 100, 102, 103
-O- Delete 298
Display 124, 125, 134, 137, 139, 143, 146
Open reference 305
Export 304, 335, 336, 338, 341, 346, 349
Output control report 314
Import 304, 335, 353, 355, 356, 358
Output Profile Elevations 243
Open 306
Output Section Elevations 246
Sort 333

-P- -T-
Place Contour 116
TerraModeler 10, 223
Place Elevation Text 118
About tool 219
Place Slope Arrow 119
Help 222
Place Sloped Line 185
Installation 13
Produce contours 316
Load 16
Produce lattice models 319
Requirements 12
Produce triangles 324
Settings 38
Profile settings 301
Unload 16
Profiles 227
Draw 228, 234 Thin 302
Output 243, 246 Thin Linear Element 191
Project from/into 250, 252 Triangulate Elements 96
Triangulate Multiple Sources 100
Project From Profile 250
Triangulate Survey 102
Project Into Profile 252
Triangulate View 103

-R- -U-
Read Piles From File 186
Update Displays 151
Rebuild Models 95
Update Profile 254
Regions 282, 290
Assign new boundary 291
Create region 283, 290
Delete region 286, 291
-V-
Edit region info 287, 290 Validate Linear Elements 192
Move region center 289, 291 View Elevation 170
Update 294 View Slope 172
View list 291, 292 View statistics 332
Remove Point 217
Restore from file 306

-S-
Save Surfaces 224
Set Contour Elevation 85
Set Linear Elevation 188
Set Scale 225
Settings 223
Setup Automatic Sections 253
Statistical model 328

TerraModeler User Guide © 2021 Terrasolid Ltd